Sunteți pe pagina 1din 281

BSC6900 GSM V900R013C00

Hardware Description
Issue Date 09 2013-05-29

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Overview
This document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users with a detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.

Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name BSC6900 Product Version V900R013C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for: l l Installers Site operators

Organization
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description. 2 Physical Structure The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT. 3 Cabinet The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

About This Document

4 Components of the Cabinet Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution box or high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cable tray. 5 Subracks This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an independent unit. 6 Boards This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900. 7 Cables This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet. 8 LEDs on the Boards This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards. 9 DIP Switches on Components This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

About This Document

Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New

Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

About This Document

Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2

Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description..........................................................1 2 Physical Structure..........................................................................................................................8 3 Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................10
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................11 3.2 Classification of Cabinets.............................................................................................................................................12 3.3 Components of the Cabinet..........................................................................................................................................13 3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet.......................................................................................................................17 3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet................................................................................................................................18 3.5.1 Relationship Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components..............................................................................18 3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet..............................................................................22 3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR...............................................................................................................28 3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR................................................................................................................32 3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR ..............................................................................................................37

4 Components of the Cabinet.......................................................................................................41


4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box...........................................................................................................................43 4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box...........................................................................................43 4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box............................................................................................44 4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box......................................................................45 4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box..........................................................46 4.2 Common Power Distribution Box................................................................................................................................47 4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box...............................................................................................47 4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box................................................................................................49 4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box..........................................................................49 4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box...............................................................50 4.3 Air Defence Subrack....................................................................................................................................................52 4.4 Rear Cable Trough........................................................................................................................................................53 4.5 Cable Tray....................................................................................................................................................................53 4.6 KVM.............................................................................................................................................................................54 4.7 LAN Switch..................................................................................................................................................................55 4.8 GBAM..........................................................................................................................................................................57 4.8.1 Functions of GBAM..................................................................................................................................................58 Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Contents

4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).................................................................................................58 4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...........................................................................................61 4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)...................................................................................................64 4.9 Independent Fan Subrack.............................................................................................................................................67 4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack............................................................................................................67 4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack........................................................................................68

5 Subracks........................................................................................................................................70
5.1 Classification of Subracks............................................................................................................................................71 5.2 Components of the Subrack..........................................................................................................................................71 5.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)............................................................................................................73 5.3 Slots in the Subrack......................................................................................................................................................76 5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack...........................................................................................................................................76 5.5 Configuration of the Subrack.......................................................................................................................................79 5.5.1 Configuration of the MPS..........................................................................................................................................79 5.5.2 Configuration of the EPS...........................................................................................................................................81 5.5.3 Configuration of the TCS..........................................................................................................................................82 5.6 Technical Specifications of the Subrack.......................................................................................................................83

6 Boards............................................................................................................................................84
6.1 DPUa Board..................................................................................................................................................................89 6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board....................................................................................................................................89 6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board...........................................................................................................................................89 6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board.........................................................................................................................................90 6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board............................................................................................................91 6.2 DPUc Board..................................................................................................................................................................91 6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board....................................................................................................................................92 6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board...........................................................................................................................................92 6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board.........................................................................................................................................94 6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board............................................................................................................94 6.3 DPUd Board.................................................................................................................................................................95 6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board...................................................................................................................................95 6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board..........................................................................................................................................95 6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board.........................................................................................................................................97 6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board............................................................................................................97 6.4 DPUf Board..................................................................................................................................................................98 6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board....................................................................................................................................98 6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................................................99 6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board........................................................................................................................................101 6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................101 6.5 DPUg Board...............................................................................................................................................................102 6.5.1 Functions of the DPUg Board.................................................................................................................................102 6.5.2 Panel of the DPUg Board........................................................................................................................................102 6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg Board.......................................................................................................................................104 Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Contents

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board..........................................................................................................104 6.6 EIUa Board.................................................................................................................................................................105 6.6.1 Functions of the EIUa Board...................................................................................................................................105 6.6.2 Panel of the EIUa Board..........................................................................................................................................105 6.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board.........................................................................................................................................106 6.6.4 Ports on the EIUa Board..........................................................................................................................................107 6.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board............................................................................................................................108 6.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board...........................................................................................................110 6.7 FG2a Board.................................................................................................................................................................111 6.7.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...................................................................................................................................111 6.7.2 Panel of the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................................111 6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board........................................................................................................................................112 6.7.4 Ports on the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................................113 6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board...........................................................................................................114 6.8 FG2c Board.................................................................................................................................................................114 6.8.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................115 6.8.2 Panel of the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................................115 6.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board........................................................................................................................................116 6.8.4 Ports on the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................................117 6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board...........................................................................................................117 6.9 FG2d Board................................................................................................................................................................118 6.9.1 Functions of the FG2d Board..................................................................................................................................119 6.9.2 Panel of the FG2d Board.........................................................................................................................................119 6.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d Board........................................................................................................................................121 6.9.4 Ports on the FG2d Board.........................................................................................................................................121 6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Board...........................................................................................................122 6.10 GCUa and GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................................123 6.10.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board....................................................................................................................123 6.10.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................123 6.10.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board..........................................................................................................................124 6.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................125 6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board............................................................................................126 6.11 GOUa Board.............................................................................................................................................................126 6.11.1 Functions of the GOUa Board...............................................................................................................................126 6.11.2 Panel of the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................................127 6.11.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................................127 6.11.4 Ports on the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................................128 6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board.......................................................................................................128 6.12 GOUc Board.............................................................................................................................................................130 6.12.1 Functions of the GOUc Board...............................................................................................................................130 6.12.2 Panel of the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................................131 6.12.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board.....................................................................................................................................132 Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Contents

6.12.4 Ports on the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................................132 6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board.......................................................................................................133 6.13 GOUd Board.............................................................................................................................................................134 6.13.1 Functions of the GOUd Board...............................................................................................................................135 6.13.2 Panel of the GOUd Board......................................................................................................................................135 6.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd Board.....................................................................................................................................137 6.13.4 Ports on the GOUd Board......................................................................................................................................137 6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board.......................................................................................................138 6.14 MDMC Board...........................................................................................................................................................139 6.14.1 Functions of the MDMC Board.............................................................................................................................139 6.14.2 Panel of the MDMC Board....................................................................................................................................140 6.14.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board...................................................................................................................................140 6.14.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board.........................................................................................................................141 6.15 OIUa Board...............................................................................................................................................................142 6.15.1 Functions of the OIUa Board.................................................................................................................................142 6.15.2 Panel of the OIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................142 6.15.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board......................................................................................................................................143 6.15.4 Ports on the OIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................144 6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board.........................................................................................................144 6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................................146 6.16.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board..................................................................................................................146 6.16.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................147 6.16.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board........................................................................................................................148 6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................149 6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board..........................................................................................149 6.17 OMUc Board............................................................................................................................................................151 6.17.1 Functions of the OMUc Board..............................................................................................................................151 6.17.2 Panel of the OMUc Board.....................................................................................................................................152 6.17.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board....................................................................................................................................153 6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc Board.....................................................................................................................................154 6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board.......................................................................................................154 6.18 PAMU Board............................................................................................................................................................156 6.18.1 Functions of the PAMU Board..............................................................................................................................156 6.18.2 Panel of the PAMU Board.....................................................................................................................................156 6.18.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board....................................................................................................................................157 6.18.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board..........................................................................................................................158 6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board......................................................................................................159 6.19 PEUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................159 6.19.1 Functions of the PEUa Board................................................................................................................................159 6.19.2 Panel of the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................................................160 6.19.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board......................................................................................................................................160 6.19.4 Ports on the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................................................161 Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Contents

6.19.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................................161 6.19.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................164 6.20 PFCU Board.............................................................................................................................................................165 6.20.1 Functions of the PFCU Board...............................................................................................................................165 6.20.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board............................................................................................................................165 6.20.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board........................................................................................................167 6.21 POUc Board..............................................................................................................................................................167 6.21.1 Functions of the POUc Board................................................................................................................................168 6.21.2 Panel of the POUc Board.......................................................................................................................................168 6.21.3 LEDs on the POUc Board.....................................................................................................................................170 6.21.4 Ports on the POUc Board.......................................................................................................................................170 6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board........................................................................................................171 6.22 SCUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................173 6.22.1 Functions of the SCUa Board................................................................................................................................173 6.22.2 Panel of the SCUa Board.......................................................................................................................................174 6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board......................................................................................................................................176 6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board.......................................................................................................................................176 6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board........................................................................................................177 6.23 SCUb Board..............................................................................................................................................................178 6.23.1 Functions of the SCUb Board................................................................................................................................179 6.23.2 Panel of the SCUb Board.......................................................................................................................................179 6.23.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board.....................................................................................................................................180 6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board.......................................................................................................................................181 6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board........................................................................................................182 6.24 TNUa Board.............................................................................................................................................................184 6.24.1 Functions of the TNUa Board...............................................................................................................................184 6.24.2 Panel of the TNUa Board......................................................................................................................................184 6.24.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board.....................................................................................................................................185 6.24.4 Ports on the TNUa Board......................................................................................................................................186 6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board........................................................................................................186 6.25 XPUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................187 6.25.1 Functions of the XPUa Board................................................................................................................................187 6.25.2 Panel of the XPUa Board.......................................................................................................................................188 6.25.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board.....................................................................................................................................189 6.25.4 Ports on the XPUa Board.......................................................................................................................................190 6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board........................................................................................................190 6.26 XPUb Board.............................................................................................................................................................191 6.26.1 Functions of the XPUb Board...............................................................................................................................191 6.26.2 Panel of the XPUb Board......................................................................................................................................192 6.26.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board.....................................................................................................................................193 6.26.4 Ports on the XPUb Board......................................................................................................................................194 6.26.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board........................................................................................................194 Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Contents

6.27 WOPB Board............................................................................................................................................................195 6.27.1 Functions of the WOPB Board..............................................................................................................................195

7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................196
7.1 Power Cables..............................................................................................................................................................199 7.2 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................................202 7.3 Optical Cable..............................................................................................................................................................204 7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler).................................................................................................................206 7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable................................................................................................................................................209 7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable......................................................................................................................211 7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable......................................................................................................................................214 7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable............................................................................................................216 7.9 Inter-TNUa Cable.......................................................................................................................................................219 7.10 BITS Clock Cable.....................................................................................................................................................221 7.11 Y-Shaped Clock Cable.............................................................................................................................................223 7.12 Line Clock Signal Cable...........................................................................................................................................224 7.13 Straight-Through Cable............................................................................................................................................225 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack.....................................................................................227 7.15 Alarm Box Signal Cable...........................................................................................................................................229 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box........................................................................................230 7.17 GPS Signal Transmission Cable...............................................................................................................................232 7.18 OMU serial cable......................................................................................................................................................233 7.19 EMU RS485 Communication Cable........................................................................................................................233 7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable...........................................................................................................................................234

8 LEDs on the Boards...................................................................................................................236


8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board..........................................................................................................................................238 8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board..........................................................................................................................................238 8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board..........................................................................................................................................239 8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................................................239 8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board..........................................................................................................................................240 8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board............................................................................................................................................241 8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board...........................................................................................................................................241 8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board...........................................................................................................................................242 8.9 LEDs on the FG2d Board...........................................................................................................................................243 8.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board.............................................................................................................................244 8.11 LEDs on the GOUa Board........................................................................................................................................244 8.12 LEDs on the GOUc Board........................................................................................................................................245 8.13 LEDs on the GOUd Board........................................................................................................................................246 8.14 LEDs on the MDMC Board......................................................................................................................................247 8.15 LEDs on the OIUa Board.........................................................................................................................................247 8.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board...........................................................................................................................248 8.17 LEDs on the OMUc Board.......................................................................................................................................249 8.18 LEDs on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................................................249 Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Contents

8.19 LEDs on the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................................................250 8.20 LEDs on the POUc Board........................................................................................................................................251 8.21 LEDs on the SCUa Board.........................................................................................................................................251 8.22 LEDs on the SCUb Board........................................................................................................................................252 8.23 LEDs on the TNUa Board........................................................................................................................................253 8.24 LEDs on the XPUa Board........................................................................................................................................254 8.25 LEDs on the XPUb Board........................................................................................................................................254

9 DIP Switches on Components................................................................................................256


9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.........................................................................................................................................257 9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board...............................................................................................................................259 9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board..............................................................................................................................262 9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board...............................................................................................................................262 9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board..............................................................................................................................263 9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.................................................................................................................................266

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xii

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.

09 (2013-05-29)
This is the ninth commercial release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Board 6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board Description The maximum packet forwarding rate (UL+DL) is added in Table 2 Specifications of the board processing capability.

Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue does not exclude any topics.

08 (2013-01-28)
This is the eighth commercial release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet 5.5.1 Configuration of the MPS 5.5.2 Configuration of the EPS
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Description The description about heat dissipation is added. The description about the A over IP subrack configuration mode is deleted.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Content 6 Boards

Description The description on the number of the DPUa, DPUc, DPUd, DPUf, DPUg, EIUa, FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, GOUd, NIUa, OIUa, OMUa/OMUb, PEUa, POUc, XPUa, and XPUb boards that can be configured is optimized. The description about the functions of the DPUc/DPUf board is modified.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board 6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board Front Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) Front Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) Rear Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) Front Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) 6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/ OMUb Board 6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc Board 6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board 6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board 6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board

The function of the ports is modified.

The description of hard disk capacity is added.

Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue does not exclude any following topics.

07 (2012-09-17)
This is the seventh commercial release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Content 5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack

Description l The function description of the last bit of the DIP is added. l The description of setting the DIP is added.

6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/ OMUb Board 6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc Board 6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board 6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board 6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board 6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board 6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board 6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board

The function of COM port is modified.

l The specifications of the optical ports on this board are updated. l The receiver sensitivity names are unified. l Saturation optical power is added.

Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue excludes the following topics: l Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

06 (2012-06-25)
This is the sixth commercial release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 6.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/ GCGa Board 6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board 6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board 6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/ OMUb Board 6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc Board 6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Description The function of COM port is modified.

The function of USB and COM port are modified.

Hard disk capacity is modified to 73 GB or above x 2 (RAID 1).


3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue does not exclude any topics.

05 (2012-01-05)
This is the fifth commercial release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue includes the following new topics: l 6.9 FG2d Board 6.9.1 Functions of the FG2d Board 6.9.2 Panel of the FG2d Board 6.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d Board 6.9.4 Ports on the FG2d Board 6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Board l 6.13 GOUd Board 6.13.1 Functions of the GOUd Board 6.13.2 Panel of the GOUd Board 6.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd Board 6.13.4 Ports on the GOUd Board 6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes. Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2011-08-31)
This is the fourth commercial release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet 6 Boards Description The following specifications are added: power consumption and heat dissipation. l The description of board replacement is added. l The information about interfaces sharing an interface board is added. l Specifications about bandwidth provided by the backplane for each board are added. 6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board Specifications about switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUa boards are added.
4

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Content 6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board 6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board 6.21.4 Ports on the POUc Board 6.15.4 Ports on the OIUa Board 6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board 6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board 6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board 6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board 6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board 6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board

Description Specifications about switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUb boards are added. The specification about board processing capability is added. The description of optical port multiplexing E1/T1 port number is added. The description of optical port multiplexing E1/T1 port number is added. The specification unit when the GOUa board functions as an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang. The specification unit when the GOUc board functions as an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang. The specification unit when the POUc board functions as an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang. The specification unit when the FG2a board functions as an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang. The specification unit when the FG2c board functions as an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang. The board slot is modified.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2011-05-30)
This is the third commercial release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 5.6 Technical Specifications of the Subrack Description The specification of power consumption is modified.

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2011-04-25)
This is the second commercial release of V900R013C00.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue includes the following new topics: l 7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board 6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board 6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board Description The specification of power consumption and weight are modified. The specification of power consumption and weight are modified. The specification of power consumption is modified.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2011-03-30)
This is the first commercial release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes. Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2011-01-31)
This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00. Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following new topics: l l l l l 6.4 DPUf Board 6.5 DPUg Board 6.17 OMUc Board 6.23 SCUb Board 7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 4.1.2 Rear Panel of the HighPower Power Distribution Box 4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Description The figure of the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box is modified. The figure of the rear panel of the common power distribution box is modified.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Content 7.19 EMU RS485 Communication Cable 6.19.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board

Description The installation of EMU RS485 communication cable is modified. The A-interface processing specification of the board is added: CIC (64K).

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

2 Physical Structure

2
Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure. Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure

Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.

(1) GPS: Global Positioning System (3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

(2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)

Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

2 Physical Structure

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900 Component Cabinet Cables GPS antenna system Description For details, see 3 Cabinet. For details, see 7 Cables. The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper, and surge protector. The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. It is optional. LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal software and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. The LMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900. For details, see the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

3
About This Chapter

Cabinet

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet. 3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door cabinet. 3.2 Classification of Cabinets Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR). 3.3 Components of the Cabinet When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different from those of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components of the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR. 3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), power consumption, and heat dissipation. 3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in the cabinet.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet


The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door cabinet. Figure 3-1 shows the single-door cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door cabinet. Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet

3.2 Classification of Cabinets


Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).

MPR
Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.

EPR
The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can be configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.

TCR
The number of TCRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume and the configuration modes of subracks. Up to two TCRs can be configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure a TCR.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

For details on the components of the MPR, the EPR, or the TCR, see 3.3 Components of the Cabinet.

3.3 Components of the Cabinet


When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different from those of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components of the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.

Components of the MPR (Configured with the OMU)/EPR/TCR


When the MPR cabinet is configured with the OMU board, the components of the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR. The components are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence subrack, independent fan subrack, cable rack, rack, and rear cable trough. Figure 3-3 shows the components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

(1) Air inlet (4) Air defence subrack (7) Cable rack

(2) Independent fan subrack (5) Filler panel (8) Rear cable trough

(3) Subrack (6) Power distribution box (9) Cable rack

Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations Component 4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box or 4.2 Common Power Distribution Box Subrack Configuration One common power distribution box or one high-power power distribution box is configured.

l The MPR is configured with one main processing subrack (MPS). In addition, depending on the traffic volume, it is configured with zero to two extended processing subracks (EPSs) or transcoder subracks (TCSs). l The EPR is configured with one to three EPSs, depending on the traffic volume. l The TCR is configured with one to three TCSs, depending on the traffic volume.

Air Defence Subrack Independent Fan Subrack Rear Cable Trough Cable Tray

Two air defence subracks are configured. Only one independent fan subrack is configured. Three rear cable troughs are configured. If a BSC6900 is configured with two cabinets and the cabling distance between the two cabinets is longer than 10 m, a cable tray is configured for each cabinet. Optical fibers go through the cable tray installed at the bottom of a cabinet.

NOTE

The subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.

Components of the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)


When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, its components are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence subrack, KVM, LAN switch, cable tray, GBAM, and rear cable trough. Figure 3-4 shows the components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)

(1) GBAM (2) Filler panel

(3) Cable tray

(4) LAN switch (5) KVM (10) Rear cable trough

(6) Subrack (7) Air defence subrack (8) Power distribution box (9) Cable rack

Table 3-2 lists the components of the MPR and describes their configurations. Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations Component 4.2 Common Power Distribution Box Configuration Only one common power distribution box is configured.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Component Subrack

Configuration The MPR is configured with one MPS. In addition, depending on the traffic volume, it is configured with zero to two EPSs or TCSs. Two air defence subracks are configured. The KVM is optional. The MPR can be configured with one KVM. One LAN switch is configured. One is configured. One GBAM is configured. Three rear cable troughs are configured.

Air Defence Subrack KVM LAN switch Cable Tray GBAM Rear Cable Trough

NOTE

The MPR can use the common power distribution box but not the high-power distribution box when it is configured with the GBAM.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet


The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), power consumption, and heat dissipation.

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-22)


The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet. Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22). Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22) Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Height of the available space Weight Specification 2200 mm x 600 mm x 800 mm 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches) l Empty cabinet 100 kg l Cabinet in full configuration 320 kg Rated input voltage Input voltage range -48 V DC power supply -40 V to -57 V

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Item EMC

Specification l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/ EEC

Power consumption

The cabinet power consumption equals the sum of power consumption of all subracks in the cabinet. It is recommended that the power distribution system provide a maximum of 5100 W power per cabinet to facilitate capacity expansion.

Heat consumption

The heat generated by a cabinet equals the total heat generated by all subracks in the cabinet. To facilitate capacity expansion in future, the air conditioning system installed onsite must be able to dissipate a maximum of 4100 W heat from each cabinet.

Heat dissipation

A fan and air defense frames are installed in a BSC cabinet. Air flows in from the bottom of the cabinet and flows out from the top of the cabinet, ensuring good heat dissipation.

WARNING
When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope, multiple boards will become abnormal at the same time. Therefore, check the power system if multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet


This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in the cabinet.

3.5.1 Relationship Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components


This section describes the fixed relationship between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components in the cabinet.

Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box


For details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle. Figure 3-5 shows the relationship between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a high-power power distribution box. Table 3-4 describes the relationship
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a high-power power distribution box. Figure 3-5 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power distribution box)

Table 3-4 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power distribution box) PDF Output Input of Power Distribution Box Output of Power Distribut ion Box A7 NEG (-) A8 NEG (-) 63 A -48 V DC output 2 B1(-) B7 NEG(-) B8 NEG(-) 63 A RTN power output 1 A1(+) A7 RTN (+) Subrack Input

63 A -48 V DC output 1

A1(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on the independent fan subrack -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2 -48 V DC input 1 on the independent fan subrack -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2 RTN power input 2 on the independent fan subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

PDF Output

Input of Power Distribution Box

Output of Power Distribut ion Box A8 RTN (+)

Subrack Input

RTN power input 2 on subrack 2 RTN power input 1 on the independent fan subrack RTN power input 1 on subrack 2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0 RTN power input 2 on subrack 1 RTN power input 2 on subrack 0 RTN power input 1 on subrack 1 RTN power input 1 on subrack 0

63 A RTN power output 2

B1(+)

B7 RTN (+) B8 RTN (+)

100 A -48 V DC output 1

A3(-)

A9 NEG (-) A10 NEG (-)

100 A -48 V DC output 2

B3(-)

B9 NEG(-) B10 NEG (-)

100 A RTN power output 1

A3(+)

A9 RTN (+) A10 RTN (+)

100 A RTN power output 2

B3(+)

B9 RTN (+) B10 RTN (+)

Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution Box


Figure 3-6 shows the relationship between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a common power distribution box. Table 3-5 describes the relationship between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a common power distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-6 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power distribution box)

Table 3-5 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power distribution box) PDF Output Input of Power Distribution Box Output of Power Distribut ion Box I -48V1 II -48V1 III -48V1 100 A -48 V DC output 2 -48V2 I -48V2 II -48V2 III -48V2 100 A RTN power output 1 RTN RTN RTN Subrack Input

100 A -48 V DC output 1

-48V1

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0 RTN power input 1 on subrack 2 RTN power input 1 on subrack 1

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

PDF Output

Input of Power Distribution Box

Output of Power Distribut ion Box RTN

Subrack Input

RTN power input 1 on subrack 0 RTN power input 2 on subrack 2 RTN power input 2 on subrack 1 RTN power input 2 on subrack 0

100 A RTN power output 2

RTN

RTN RTN RTN

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet


The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack and independent fan subrack, thereby ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack and independent fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the ground bar in the equipment room, thereby protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.

Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)/EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR are the same as the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the EPR/TCR. Figure 3-7 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR that is configured with the high-power power distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with the high-power power distribution box)

Table 3-6 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet SN 5, 6, 11, 12 3, 4, 9, 10 1, 2, 7, 8 13 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 24, 25, 26 27, 28, 29, 30 31 50-57 Description Power cables for the bottom subrack Power cables for the middle subrack Power cables for the top subrack PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and the mounting bar PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting bar Inter-cabinet PGND cables Power cables for the independent fan subrack PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack and the mounting bar PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)
Figure 3-8 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is configured with GBAM IBM X3650T. Figure 3-9 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is configured with GBAM HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T)

Table 3-7 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is configured with IBM X3650T.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T) SN 1-8 9, 10 11 12 11.1.1, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.2.2 13 14, 15, 16, 17 18, 19 20 21 22, 23 24-31 Description Power cables for subracks Power cables for the LAN switch Power cable for the KVM Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box Power cables for the GBAM PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and the busbar PGND cables for subracks PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets PGND cable for the KVM PGND cable for the LAN switch PGND cables for the GBAM PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)

Table 3-8 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310) SN 1-8 11 12 11.1.1, 11.2.1 9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.1.2, 11.2.2, 11.1.3, 11.2.3 13 14, 15, 16, 17 18, 19 20 21 22, 23 24-31 Description Power cables for subracks Power cable for the KVM Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box Power cables for the LAN switch Power cables for the GBAM PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and the busbar PGND cables for subracks PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets PGND cable for the KVM PGND cable for the LAN switch PGND cables for the GBAM PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR


The signal cables for the MPR are the 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITS clock signal cable, Y-shaped clock signal cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box. For details about different types of signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-10 shows the connections of signal cables for the MPR that is configured with one MPS subrack and two EPS subracks.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the MPR

NOTE

l The types and quantity of interface boards shown in Figure 3-10 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning. l The quantity and installation positions of Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables shown in Figure 3-10 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Table 3-9 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1 SMB male connector/CLKIN1 port on the GCUa board in slot 13 of the MPS SMB male connector/CLKIN0 port on the GCUa board in slot 13 of the MPS SMB male connector/CLKIN1 port on the GCUa board in slot 12 of the MPS SMB male connector/CLKIN0 port on the GCUa board in slot 12 of the MPS RJ45/CLKOUT0 port on the GCUa board in slot 12 or 13 of the MPS RJ45/CLKOUT0 port on the GCUa board in slot 12 or 13 of the MPS DB14/TDM port on the TNUa board in slot 4 or 5 of the MPS DB14/TDM port on the TNUa board in slot 4 or 5 of the MPS Connector Type 2/Connection Position 2 Connector of the BITS clock/BITS clock port Remarks

1, 2, 3, and 4

75-ohm coaxial cable or 120-ohm twisted pair cable connecting the GCUa board to the BITS clock 75-ohm coaxial cable or 120-ohm twisted pair cable connecting the GCUa board to the BITS clock 75-ohm coaxial cable or 120-ohm twisted pair cable connecting the GCUa board to the BITS clock 75-ohm coaxial cable or 120-ohm twisted pair cable connecting the GCUa board to the BITS clock

Connector of the BITS clock/BITS clock port

Figure 3-10 shows the clock cables connected to the CLKIN1 and CLKIN0 ports. In practice, only one port is connected to the BITS clock source.

Connector of the BITS clock/BITS clock port

Connector of the BITS clock/BITS clock port

Y-shaped clock signal cable connecting the GCUa board to the SCUb board Y-shaped clock signal cable connecting the GCUa board to the SCUb board Cable connecting TNUa boards in different subracks Cable connecting TNUa boards in different subracks

RJ45/CLKIN port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/CLKIN port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS

DB14/TDM port on the TNUa board in slot 4 or 5 of the EPS DB14/TDM port on the TNUa board in slot 4 or 5 of the EPS

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN

Description

Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1 DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa board in slot 14 or 15 of the MPS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa board in slot 14 or 15 of the EPS DB15/Port on the rear panel of the power distribution box LC connector/Slot 27 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS

Connector Type 2/Connection Position 2 DDF or other NEs

Remarks

9 and 10

E1/T1 cable for the EIUa board

11

E1/T1 cable for the EIUa board

DDF or other NEs

12

Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box Optical cable between the MPS and the TCS SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks

DB9/MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack OIUa board in the TCS, ODF, or other NEs RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN

Description

Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1 RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS RJ45/Ethernet port on the OMUc board

Connector Type 2/Connection Position 2 RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS RJ45/Ethernet port on the M2000 or of the LAN

Remarks

20

SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks Ethernet cable between the OMUc board and the M2000 or LAN

21

22

The Ethernet port on the OMUc board is connected to the Ethernet port on the M2000 or of the LAN. One monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is mandatory and is installed before delivery.

23

Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

DB15/MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack

DB9/MONITOR port on the rear of the subrack at the bottom

NOTE

The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR


The signal cables for the EPR are the 75-ohm coaxial cable, 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock signal cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box. For details about different types of signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-11 shows the connections of signal cables for the EPR that is configured with three EPS subracks.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the EPR

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

3 Cabinet

l The types and quantity of interface boards shown in Figure 3-11 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning. l The quantity and installation positions of Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables shown in Figure 3-11 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Table 3-10 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR. Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the EPR SN 1 Description l SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l Multi-mode optical cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks 2 l SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l Multi-mode optical cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks 3 SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 1 RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN 5

Description l SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l Multi-mode optical cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks

Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 1 RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS

Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS

SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l Multi-mode optical cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS

l SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l Multi-mode optical cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN 10

Description l SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l Multi-mode optical cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks

Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 1 RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the EPS

Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS

11

l SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l Multi-mode optical cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the MPS

12

l SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks l Multi-mode optical cable connecting SCUb boards in different subracks

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the EPS

RJ45/10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the MPS

13, 14, and 15 16, 17, and 18 19

E1/T1 cable for the EIUa board Cable connecting TNUa boards in different subracks Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa board in slot 14 or 15 of the EPS DB14/TDM port on the TNUa board in slot 4 or 5 of the EPS DB15/Port on the rear panel of the power distribution box

DDF or other NEs

DB14/TDM port on the TNUa board in slot 4 or 5 of the EPS DB9/MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN 20

Description Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

Connector Type 1/ Connection Position 1 DB15/MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack

Connector Type 2/ Connection Position 2 DB9/MONITOR port on the rear of the subrack at the bottom

NOTE

The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR


The signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box. For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-12 shows the connections of the signal cables for the TCR.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

3 Cabinet

l The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure 3-12 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning. l Among the multiple TCSs configured in the BSC6900 cabinet, one TCS is responsible for forwarding the OM signals from other TCSs, and this TCS is referred to as the main TCS. In Figure 3-12, the lowest TCS serves as the main subrack. In practice, any TCS can serve as the main subrack, and the SCUb board in the main TCS is connected to the SCUb boards in other TCSs in star topology.

Table 3-11 describes the connections of signal cables for the TCR. Table 3-11 Explanation of connections of signal cables for the TCR SN 1 Description Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards of different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards of different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards of different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards of different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards of different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards of different subracks SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards of different subracks Connector Type1/ Connection Position1 DB15/Port connecting the power distribution box to the independent fan subrack RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the main TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the main TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the main TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the main TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the main TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the main TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the main TCS Connector Type2/ Connection Position2 DB9/MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the TCS RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 6 of the TCS

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN 9

Description SFP+ high-speed cable connecting SCUb boards of different subracks Cable connecting TNUa boards of different subracks E1/T1 cable for the EIUa board Optical cable between different subracks Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

Connector Type1/ Connection Position1 RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the main TCS DB14/TDM ports on the TNUa boards in slots 4 and 5 of the TCS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa board in slot 14 or 15 of the TCS LC optical port/The RX/TX port on the OIUa board in slot 27 of the TCS DB15/MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack

Connector Type2/ Connection Position2 RJ45/The 10G port on the SCUb board in slot 7 of the TCS DB14/TDM ports on the TNUa boards in slots 4 and 5 of the TCS DDF or other NEs

10, 11, 12 13, 14, 15 16

OIUa board of the MPS/ EPS or ODF DB9/Monitor port on the rear of the bottom subrack

17

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

4
About This Chapter

Components of the Cabinet

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution box or high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cable tray. 4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top. 4.2 Common Power Distribution Box A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top. 4.3 Air Defence Subrack The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height. 4.4 Rear Cable Trough The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables. 4.5 Cable Tray The cable tray provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch. 4.6 KVM KVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of the GBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM. 4.7 LAN Switch The LAN switch is configured in the MPR. 4.8 GBAM The BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310. The GBAM is installed in the MPR. 4.9 Independent Fan Subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box


A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top. The high-power power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection for the four -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet. Each group has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The high-power power distribution box also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and visual alarms when faults occur.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box


The components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel of the Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches. Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the high-power power distribution box. Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box

(1) Panel of the PAMU board (4) Mute switch


NOTE

(2) RUN LED (5) Power switches

(3) ALM LED (6) Labels for power switches

l l

For details about the PAMU board, see 6.18 PAMU Board. When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time, indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the power distribution box.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated. l l If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is faulty. If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audible alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the high-power power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box. Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s OFF Description The PAMU board is functional and communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board properly. The PAMU board is not working or it does not communicate with the SCUa/ SCUb board properly. There is no power supply to the PAMU board or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm related to the power distribution box. The power distribution box is faulty. During the self-check of the PAMU board, however, the ALM LED is also ON. This indicates that the ALM LED is functional.

ALM

Red

OFF ON

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box


The components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power input terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack, and a 2-hole ground screw. Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box. Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

(1) Power input terminal block

(2) Power output terminal block

(3) Port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


(4) 2-hole ground screw (5) J1 port

4 Components of the Cabinet


(6) J2 port (port used to connect the power distribution box to a EMU)

NOTE

l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box. l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable are labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3 (+) and 1(+) respectively. l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box


This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the high-power power distribution box. Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box. Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD) Item Power consumption Input Rated input voltage Input voltage range Input mode Specification 30 W -48 V DC or -60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each group has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power inputs. The maximum rated input current of each route is 100 A. -48 V DC or -60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group has one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC power outputs. The maximum rated output current of each output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A. Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7 to A10 and B7 to B10. These MCBs provide the power surge protection function.

Max. input current Output Rated output voltage Output voltage range Output mode and current

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Item Output protection specifications Rated output power

Specification The power surge protection point is 70 A. You need to manually switch on the corresponding MCB after the power surge protection. 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)

NOTE For group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 corresponds to power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs B1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box


The high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a fixed relationship between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of the cabinet. Figure 4-3 shows the relationship between the eight power switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relationship between the eight power switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR. Figure 4-3 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-3 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR Component Subrack 2 Subrack 1 Subrack 0 Independent fan subrack Power Switch A8, B8 A9, B9 A10, B10 A7, B7

4.2 Common Power Distribution Box


A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top. The common power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection for the two -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet. Each group has three -48 V outputs and three RTN outputs. The common power distribution box also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and visual alarms when faults occur.

4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box


The components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of the Distribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, power switches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB). Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the common power distribution box. Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box

(1) Panel of the MDMC board (5) Labels for power switches
NOTE

(2) RUN LED (6) Power switches

(3) ALM LED (7) Panel of the WOPB board

(4) Mute switch

For details about the MDMC and WOPB boards, see 6.14 MDMC Board and 6.27 WOPB Board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

CAUTION
l l Before operating a power switch, refer to the label for the power switch on the panel of the common power distribution box. Before removing a component from the cabinet, one must turn off the power switch that controls power supply to the component and remove the power cable for the component.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated. l l If you set the mute switch to ON, the common power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is faulty. If you set the mute switch to OFF, the common power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the common power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM. Table 4-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box. Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s OFF Description The MDMC board is functional and communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board properly. The MDMC is not working or it does not communicate with the SCUa/SCUb board properly. There is no power supply to the MDMC board or the common power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm related to the common power distribution box. The common power distribution box is faulty. During the self-check of the MDMC board, however, the ALM LED is also on. This indicates that the ALM LED is functional.

ALM

Red

OFF ON

NOTE

When the common power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time, indicating that the MDMC board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the common power distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box


The components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power input terminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack. Figure 4-5 shows the rear panel of the common power distribution box. Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box

(1) Power input terminal block

(2) Power output terminal block (3) Port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack

(4) COM1 port (port used to connect (5) COM2 port the power distribution box to an EMU)

NOTE

l Figure 4-5 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box. l The port on the power distribution box is connected to the bottom subrack through the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

On the power input terminal block and power output terminal block, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48 V and RTN, respectively.

4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box


This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the common power distribution box. Table 4-5 describes the technical specifications of the common power distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box Item Power consumption Input Rated input voltage Input voltage range Input mode Max. input current Specification 30 W -48 V DC -40 V DC to -57 V DC Two -48 V DC inputs Two power inputs. The maximum current of each input is 100 A. -48 V DC -40 V DC to -57 V DC Six groups of independent power outputs. Each group has one -48 V DC power output and one RTN power output. Each output can be switched on or off, and is provided with the power surge protection function. When the total current of the six outputs is smaller than 100 A, the maximum current of each output is 70 A. The power surge protection point is 87.5 A. You need to manually switch on the corresponding MCB after the power surge protection. Hot backup mode: 4,800 W

Output

Rated output voltage Output voltage range Output mode and current

Output protection specifications

Rated output power

4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box


There is a fixed relationship between the six outputs of the common power distribution box and the components in the cabinet.

Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)/ EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the distribution of power switches on the common power distribution box in the MPR is the same as the distribution of power switches on the common power distribution box in the EPR/TCR. Figure 4-6 shows the relationship between the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

the cabinet. Table 4-6 describes the relationship between the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in the cabinet. Figure 4-6 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

Table 4-6 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR Component Subrack 2 Subrack 1 Subrack 0 Power Switch SW1, SW4 SW2, SW5 SW3, SW6

Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)


Figure 4-7 shows the relationship between the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM. Table 4-7 describes the relationship between the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-7 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the GBAM)

Table 4-7 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the GBAM) Component Subrack 1 Subrack 0 KVM LAN switch GBAM Power Switch SW1, SW4 SW2, SW5 SW3 SW3 SW3, SW6

4.3 Air Defence Subrack


The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

Physical appearance
Figure 4-8 shows the air defence subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack

Dimensions
The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm (depth).

4.4 Rear Cable Trough


The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables. Figure 4-9 shows the rear cable trough. Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough

4.5 Cable Tray


The cable tray provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch. Figure 4-10 shows the cable tray.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-10 cable tray

4.6 KVM
KVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of the GBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

Appearance
Figure 4-11 shows the KVM. Figure 4-11 KVM

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Front Panel
Figure 4-12 shows the front panel of the KVM. Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM

(1) Handles

(2) Switch on the KVM

Back Panel
Figure 4-13 shows the back panel of the KVM. Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM

(1) Ground bolt (3) Power switch

(2) DC input power socket (4) Ports used to connect to the keyboard, video, and mouse

NOTE

To insert the KVM into the cabinet, press the white buttons on both sides of the KVM and slide the buttons with index fingers, and at the same time insert the KVM into the cabinet. Then, release the buttons.

4.7 LAN Switch


The LAN switch is configured in the MPR. The LAN switch has 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports. The LAN switch connects the LMT PC to the BSC6900 and then connects the BSC6900 to the M2000.

Physical Appearance of the LAN Switch


The BSC6900 uses the Quidway S3026C LAN switches. Figure 4-14 shows the LAN switch.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-14 LAN switch

Front Panel of the LAN Switch


The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are mode switch button, configuration port, LEDs, and Ethernet ports. Figure 4-15 shows the front panel of the LAN switch. Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch

(1) POWER LED (3) Mode status LED (D/S LED) (5) 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports

(2) Mode status LED (A/L LED) (4) Mode switch button (MODE button) (6) Configuration port (CONSOLE port)

NOTE

l l

The CONSOLE port is used to configure the LAN switch to meet the requirements of the BSC6900. The MODE button is used to enable the LEDs for the 10M/100M Ethernet ports to display different types of states.

LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch


There are three LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch: POWER LED, A/L LED, and D/S LED. Table 4-8 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch LED POWER Color Green Status ON OFF ON (blink) OFF Description The LAN switch is powered on. The LAN switch is powered off. The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is traffic over the port. The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is no traffic over the port. The port is in LINK OK mode (indicating correct connection). The port is in LINK FAULT mode (indicating no connection) or in LINK ERROR mode (indicating incorrect connection). The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode. The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode. The rate of the Ethernet port is 100 Mbit/s. The rate of the Ethernet port is 10 Mbit/s.

Yellow (left) A/L Green (right)

ON OFF

Yellow (left) D/S Green (right)

ON OFF ON OFF

NOTE

Only ports 2, 4, 20, 22, 24 on the LAN switch are used.

Rear Panel of the LAN Switch


The components on the rear panel of the LAN switch are DC power socket and grounding post for the PGND cable. Figure 4-16 shows the rear panel of the LAN switch. Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch

(1) DC power socket

(2) Grounding post for the PGND cable

4.8 GBAM
The BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310. The GBAM is installed in the MPR.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

4.8.1 Functions of GBAM


The GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900. The GBAM performs the following functions: l l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management, security management, and loading management functions for the system Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the BSC6900 system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa board of the BSC6900

4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T). Figure 4-17 shows the GBAM (IBM X3650T). Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)

Front Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are LEDs, ports, switches, and a CD-ROM drive. Figure 4-18 shows the front panel of the GBAM server (IBM X3650T). Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

Table 4-9 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) No. 1 2 3 4 CRT Silkscreen Label None Description CD-ROM drive Power switch Reset switch The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), a critical fault has occurred on the system and the system cannot work properly. The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), a major fault has occurred on the system. When this occurs, the system can still work properly; however, performance deteriorates significantly. The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When the LED is on (yellow), a minor fault has occurred on the system. When this occurs, the system can still work properly. The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty. Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. USB port.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. 0 Hard disk 0 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 0 can be normally read or written to. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard disk 0 is faulty. Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or written to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 1 is faulty. Main power LED NIC0/NIC1 activity LED System ID LED

MJR

MNR

PWR

10

11

12 13 14

ON

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

No. 15 16

Silkscreen Label

Description ID switch, used to switch system IDs

None

NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system to perform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are power port, grounding post, and other ports. Figure 4-19 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T). Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM

Table 4-10 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T). Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Silkscreen Label Alarms None None None None Description DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the GBAM) PCI card bracket (with no card inserted) PCI card bracket (with a card inserted) 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter Power module PS/2 mouse/keyboard ports. The upper port is for the mouse, and the lower one is for the keyboard. Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

No. 8 9 10 11

Silkscreen Label 1 2

Description RJ45 NIC port 1 RJ45 NIC port 2 Port for the video

USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. USB port 0.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. Server management port Ultra320 SCSI port Grounding post for the PGND cable

12

13 14 15

4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210). Figure 4-20 shows the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210). Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Front Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (C5210) are LEDs, ports, switches, and a CDROM drive. Figure 4-21 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Table 4-11 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210). Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) No. 1 2 3 4 CRT Silkscreen Label None Description CD-ROM drive Power switch Reset switch The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the LED is on (yellow), a critical fault has occurred on the system, and the system cannot work properly. The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), a major fault has occurred on the system. When this occurs, the system can still work properly; however, performance deteriorates significantly. The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), a minor fault has occurred on the system. When this occurs, the system can still work properly. The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty. Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. USB port.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. 2 Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read or written to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 2 is faulty.

MJR

MNR

7 8

PWR

9 10 11

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

No. 12

Silkscreen Label 1

Description Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or written to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 1 is faulty. Main power LED NIC0/NIC1 activity LED System ID LED ID switch, used to switch system IDs

13 14 15 16 17

ON

None

NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system to perform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) are power port, grounding post, and other ports. Figure 4-22 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210). Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Table 4-12 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210). Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) No. 1 Silkscreen Label 1 Description USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. Port for the video
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

2
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

No. 3 4 5

Silkscreen Label

Description Ultra320 SCSI port

RJ45 NIC port 1 Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a Yshaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to the GBAM (C5210). Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

USB port 2.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter Grounding post for the PGND cable

8 9 10 11 12

None

None Alarms 0

DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48 V power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN cable.) DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the GBAM) RJ45 NIC port 0

4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310). Figure 4-23 shows the GBAM (HP CC3310). Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310)

Front Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are LEDs, ports, switches, and a CD-ROM drive.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-24 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310). Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Table 4-13 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310). Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) No. 1 2 3 4 CRT Silkscreen Label None Description CD-ROM drive Power switch Reset switch The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the LED is on (yellow), a critical fault has occurred on the system and the system cannot work properly. The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), a major fault has occurred on the system. When this occurs, the system can still work properly; however, performance deteriorates significantly. The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), a minor fault has occurred on the system. When this occurs, the system can still work properly. The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this LED is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty. Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. USB port.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

MJR

MNR

7 8

PWR

9 10

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

No. 11

Silkscreen Label 2

Description Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read or written to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 2 is faulty. Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or written to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 1 is faulty. Main power LED NIC0/NIC1 activity LED System ID LED ID switch, used to switch system IDs

12

13 14 15 16 17

ON

None

NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system to perform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are power port, grounding post, and other ports. Figure 4-25 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310). Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Table 4-14 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) No. 1 Silkscreen Label 1 Description USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. Port for the video Ultra320 SCSI port 1 RJ45 NIC port 1 Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a Y-shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to the GBAM (HP CC3310). Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. 2 USB port 2.The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter Grounding post for the PGND cable None DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48 V power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN cable.) DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the GBAM) RJ45 NIC port 0

2 3 4 5

8 9 10

None

11 12

Alarms 0

4.9 Independent Fan Subrack


Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack


The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack


Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack

(1) PFCU board (4) Screw

(2) Fans (5) LED on the fan box

(3) Handle of the independent fan subrack

NOTE

The PFCU is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.20 PFCU Board.

Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack


Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack

(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the power (2) Power input port distribution box (4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)

(3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)

4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack


The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight, power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). Table 4-15 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack Item Dimensions Weight Power supply Maximum power consumption Fan speed EMC Specification 86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth) Empty subrack: 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes: 6.9 kg -48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60 V DC. 150 W < 5.0 m/s Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1 (2000-03).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

5
About This Chapter

Subracks

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an independent unit. 5.1 Classification of Subracks Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS). 5.2 Components of the Subrack The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane. 5.3 Slots in the Subrack The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane. Each slot provides a different switching bandwidth. Check the bandwidth of the slot before installing a board. A board must be installed in a slot with enough bandwidth. 5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack. 5.5 Configuration of the Subrack The BSC6900 subrack configuration includes the typical configuration of the MPS, EPS, and TCS in different subrack configuration modes. 5.6 Technical Specifications of the Subrack The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

5.1 Classification of Subracks


Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).

MPS
As the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configured in the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation and maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.

EPS
As the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes the basic services of the BSC6900.

TCS
As the transcoder subrack, the TCS is configured in the MPR, EPR, or TCR in BM/TC separated configuration mode. It performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing.

5.2 Components of the Subrack


The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

Structure of the Subrack


In compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U in height. Figure 5-1 shows the construction of the subrack with the front and rear views of the component layouts of the subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack

(1) Fan box (4) Front cable trough

(2) Mounting ear (5) Boards

(3) Guide rail (6) Ground screw

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box

5 Subracks
(9) Cover plate of the DIP switch

Components
Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack. Table 5-1 Components of the subrack Component Fan box Slots in the subrack Front cable trough Refer to... 5.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board) 5.3 Slots in the Subrack The front cable trough is used to lead the cables from the front of the subrack to both sides of the cabinet. The backplane is used to connect the boards in the same subrack.

Backplane

5.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan box. This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles. Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

(1) Power unit of the fan box (4) LED on the fan box

(2) Fans (5) Screws

(3) PFCU board (6) Handles of the fan box

NOTE

l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans and keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operation of the fans. l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.20 PFCU Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box. Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates. Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board) Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s Description The fan box works normally (the fan box is registered). The fan box works normally (the fan box is not registered).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Color Red

Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

Description The fan box is registered and has one of the following problems: l One-way power supply to the subrack l Communication failure l Fans ceasing to run or running at too low a speed l Fan box in an excessively high temperature or temperature sensor failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s

The fan box is not registered and has one of the following problems: l One-way power supply to the subrack l Fans ceasing to run or running at a too low speed l Fan box in an excessively high temperature or temperature sensor failure

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa/SCUb board in the same subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa/SCUb board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment. Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box. Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board) Item Space height Input voltage range Maximum power Detectable temperature range Requirement for fan speed adjustment Specification 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm) -42 V DC to -60 V DC 150 W -5C to 55C The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55% to 100% of the full speed.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

5 Subracks

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.3 Slots in the Subrack


The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane. Each slot provides a different switching bandwidth. Check the bandwidth of the slot before installing a board. A board must be installed in a slot with enough bandwidth.

Structure of the Subrack


Figure 5-3 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 5-3 Structure of the subrack

(1) Front slot

(2) Backplane

(3) Rear slot

NOTE

l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numbered from 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27. l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pair of active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active and standby slots. For example, if slot 00 is configured with the XPUa board, then slot 01 must be configured with the XPUa board and slot 01 cannot be configured with the XPUb board. l Different types of boards can be installed in all slots other than active/standby slots. For example, if slot 00 and slot 01 are configured with XPUa boards, slot 02 and slot 03 can be configured with XPUb boards. l If the boards are in resource pool mode, then they can be installed in active/standby slots. For example, if slot 08 is configured with the DPUc board, slot 09 can be configured with the DPUf board.

5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 5-4 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack. Figure 5-4 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-4 describes the bits. Table 5-4 Description about the bits Bit 1-5 Description Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit is set to OFF, it indicates 1. Odd parity check bit Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

6 7
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Bit 8 (the most significant bit)

Description Startup type of the subrack, the default value is OFF.


NOTE l For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6000 to BSC6900, keep the former settings. l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed to OFF.

CAUTION
l You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the poweron is invalid.

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd number. The method for setting the bits is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required. Set bit 7 to ON. Set bit 8 to OFF. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF. l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON. Table 5-5 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case. Table 5-5 Setting of the DIP switch Subr ack No. 0 Bit 1 0 ON 1 1 OFF 2 0 ON 2 0 ON 0 ON 1 OFF 3 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 4 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 5 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 6 0 ON 1 OFF 1 OFF 7 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 8 1 OFF 1 OFF 1 OFF Setting of the DIP Switch

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Subr ack No. 3

Bit 1 1 OFF 2 1 OFF 0 ON 0 ON 3 0 ON 1 OF F 1 OF F 4 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 5 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 6 0 ON 1 OFF 0 ON 7 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 8 1 OFF 1 OFF 1 OFF

Setting of the DIP Switch

0 ON

1 OFF

5.5 Configuration of the Subrack


The BSC6900 subrack configuration includes the typical configuration of the MPS, EPS, and TCS in different subrack configuration modes. Principles for installing boards are as follows: l l l l The SCUa and SCUb boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7. The GCUa and GCUb boards must be installed in slots 12 and 13 in the MPS. The TNUa board must be installed in slot 4 or 5. The OMUa and OMUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. For existing BSC6900s, the OMUa and OMUb boards can be installed in slots 20 to 23. For new BSC6900s, the OMUa and OMUb boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27. The OMUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 and 25 are recommended. The XPUa/XPUb/DPUa/DPUc/DPUd/DPUf/DPUg board is preferentially installed in the front slots of a subrack. These boards are installed in the rear slots of the subrack only when the slots in the front are occupied. Interface boards must be installed in the rear slots of a subrack to facilitate cable routing. Interface boards FG2c, GOUc, and UOIc are preferentially installed in slots 16 to 23, because these boards have a high processing capability. These boards can be installed in slots 14, 15, and 24 to 27 when slots 16 to 23 are occupied.

l l

l l

5.5.1 Configuration of the MPS


The boards installed in the MPS depend on the subrack configuration mode used by the BSC6900. The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUc, SCUb, GCUa, GCGa, TNUa, XPUa/ XPUb, DPUf, DPUg, EIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, GOUa/GOUc/GOUd, POUc, OIUa, and PEUa.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

The following figures show the configurations of the MPS in BM/TC separated, BM/TC combined modes. Figure 5-5 Configuration of the MPS in BM/TC separated mode

Figure 5-6 Configuration of the MPS in BM/TC combined mode

NOTE

l The INT1 board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, POUc, or GOUa/ GOUc/GOUd. l The INT2 board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, or POUc. l If customers have also purchased the Huawei Nastar product, they need to install an SAU board in the MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode). For details on how to install software on the SAU board and how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents. l The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning should be performed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 Configuration Principles.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

5.5.2 Configuration of the EPS


The boards installed in the EPS depend on the subrack configuration mode used by the BSC6900. The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUb, TNUa, XPUa/XPUb, DPUf, DPUg, EIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, GOUa/GOUc/GOUd, POUc, OIUa, and PEUa. The following figures show the configurations of the EPS in BM/TC separated, BM/TC combined modes. Figure 5-7 Configuration of the EPS in BM/TC separated mode

Figure 5-8 Configuration of the EPS in BM/TC combined mode

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

5 Subracks

l The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, POUc, or GOUa/ GOUc/GOUd. l If customers have also purchased the Huawei Nastar product, they need to install an SAU board in the MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode). For details on how to install software on the SAU board and how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents. l The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning should be performed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 Configuration Principles.

5.5.3 Configuration of the TCS


In BM/TC separated mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR. By default, the TCS must be configured with the SCUb and TNUa boards. The DPUf/DPUg board and EIUa/OIUa board are optional boards. Figure 5-9 shows the configuration of the TCS in A over E1/T1 mode. Figure 5-9 Configuration of the TCS in A over E1/T1 mode

Figure 5-10 shows the configuration of the TCS in A over STM-1 mode.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Figure 5-10 Configuration of the TCS in A over STM-1 mode

NOTE

The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning should be performed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 Configuration Principles.

5.6 Technical Specifications of the Subrack


The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration. Table 5-6 describes the technical specifications of the subrack. Table 5-6 Technical specifications of the subrack Item Dimensions Available space height Weight Power consumption in full configuration Specification 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth) 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches) Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards: 57 kg l MPS: 1,400 W l EPS: 1,400 W l TCS: 1,000 W

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.
NOTE

Boards

If a board is configured in independent mode, its slot can switch a maximum of 4096 timeslots. If boards are configured in active/standby mode, their slots can switch a maximum of 7168 timeslots.

The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software. Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards. Table 6-1 Classification of BSC6900 boards Boar ds Logical Function Interface Supported Shared by Backplane Bandwidth of the Board When the SCUa Board Is Installed in the Same Subrack 2 GE 2 GE 2 GE Backplane Bandwidth of the Board When the SCUb Board Is Installed in the Same Subrack 2 GE 2 GE 2 GE

DPUa DPUc DPUd

GTC (GSM speech service processing) GTC (GSM speech service processing) GPCU (GSM packet service processing) GTC (GSM speech service processing) GPCU (GSM packet service processing)

DPUf DPUg

4 GE 4 GE

4 GE 4 GE

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Boar ds

Logical Function

Interface Supported

Shared by

Backplane Bandwidth of the Board When the SCUa Board Is Installed in the Same Subrack 2 GE

Backplane Bandwidth of the Board When the SCUb Board Is Installed in the Same Subrack 2 GE

EIUa

Abis_TDM Ater_TDM Pb_TDM A_TDM

A, Abis, Ater, and Pb

Cannot be shared by multiple interfaces

FG2a

GbIP (GSM BSC Gb IP interface) IP

A, Abis, and Gb

Abis and A

2 GE

2 GE

FG2c FG2d GCU a GOU a GOU c GOU d OIUa

IP IP Clock IP IP IP Abis_TDM Ater_TDM Pb_TDM A_TDM

Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb A, and Abis Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb A, Abis, Ater, and Pb

Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb Abis and A Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb Cannot be shared by multiple interfaces

4 GE 4 GE 2 GE 2 GE 4 GE 4 GE 2 GE

20 GE 20 GE 2 GE 2 GE 20 GE 20 GE 2 GE

OMU a OMU b OMU c PEUa

OAM (OM management) OAM (OM management) OAM (OM management) FR HDLC IP

Abis, and Gb, A

Cannot be shared by multiple interfaces

2 GE 2 GE 2 GE 2 GE

2 GE 2 GE 20 GE 2 GE

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Boar ds

Logical Function

Interface Supported

Shared by

Backplane Bandwidth of the Board When the SCUa Board Is Installed in the Same Subrack 4 GE

Backplane Bandwidth of the Board When the SCUb Board Is Installed in the Same Subrack 20 GE

POUc

TDM

A, Abis, Gb, Ater, and Pb

l Abis, Ater, Gb, and Pb (the Gb interface and the Pb interface do not share a board) l A and Gb

IP SCUa SCUb TNUa XPUa MAC Switching MAC Switching TDM Switching GCP (GSM BSC control plane processing) RGCP (Resource management and GSM BSC control plane processing) MCP (Mathematics Computing Process) XPUb GCP (GSM BSC control plane processing) RGCP (Resource management and GSM BSC control plane processing) MCP (Mathematics Computing Process) PAM U PFCU -

Abis and Ater 2 GE 2 GE 2 GE 2 GE

2 GE

4 GE

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.1 DPUa Board DPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a. 6.2 DPUc Board DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c. 6.3 DPUd Board DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. 6.4 DPUf Board DPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f. 6.5 DPUg Board DPUg refers to Data Processing Unit REV:g. 6.6 EIUa Board EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. 6.7 FG2a Board FG2a is short for 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV: a. 6.8 FG2c Board FG2c is short for 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. 6.9 FG2d Board FG2d refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:d. 6.10 GCUa and GCGa Board GCUa is short for General Clock Unit REV: a. GCGa is short for General Clock Unit with GPS REV: a. 6.11 GOUa Board GOUa is short for 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV: a. 6.12 GOUc Board GOUc is short for 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV :c. 6.13 GOUd Board GOUd refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:d. 6.14 MDMC Board MDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in the common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one MDMC board. 6.15 OIUa Board OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. 6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board OMUa is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:b. 6.17 OMUc Board OMUc is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV: c. 6.18 PAMU Board PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.19 PEUa Board PEUa is short for 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV: a. 6.20 PFCU Board PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each fan box is configured with one PFCU board. 6.21 POUc Board POUc refers to 4-port TDM/IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. 6.22 SCUa Board SCUa is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: a. 6.23 SCUb Board SCUb is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: b. 6.24 TNUa Board TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. In a BSC6900 using the Abis over IP and A over IP mode, the TNUa boards do not need to be configured. In a BSC6900 using other modes, install two TNUa boards in slots 4 and 5 of the MPS, EPS, and TCS. 6.25 XPUa Board XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27. 6.26 XPUb Board XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27. 6.27 WOPB Board WOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.1 DPUa Board


DPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a. The DPUa board is optional. It can be installed in the TCS. Install at least two boards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the TCS, install the DPUa boards in slots 4 to 5 and 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installed in the TCS, install the DPUa boards in slots 1 to 5 and 8 to 13.

6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board


The DPUa board processes GSM voice services. The DPUa board has 22 logical subsystems. The DPUa board performs the following functions: l l l Encodes and decodes voice services Provides data service rate adaptation Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side. This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services. l l Provides the voice enhancement function Detects voice faults automatically

6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board. Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the DPUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board

6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board. Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s Description The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF

Description The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board


The technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-3 describes the technical specifications of the DPUa board. Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 60 W 1.26 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% Supporting 960 TCH/Fs

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Processing capability

6.2 DPUc Board


DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

The DPUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. Install at least two boards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board


The DPUc board processes GSM voice services. The DPUc board has 22 logical subsystems. The DPUc board performs the following functions: l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding function if the A interface uses IP transmission. In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding functions if the BTS uses IP or HDLC transmission. l Encodes and decodes voice services In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding function if the A interface uses TDM transmission. In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUc board in the TCS performs the preceding function. l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function. This function is supported only in A over TDM mode. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side. This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services. l l Provides the voice enhancement function. This function is supported only in A over TDM mode. Detects voice faults automatically

6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board


There are only LEDs on the DPUc board. Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the DPUc board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board. Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board


The technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability. Table 6-5 describes the technical specifications of the DPUc board. Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 49.40 W 1.26 kg 0C to 45C
94

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term)


Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Processing capability

Specification -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% Supporting 960 TCH/Fs; supporting 3,740 Interworking Function(IWF) flow numbers

6.3 DPUd Board


DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. The DPUd board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. Install at least two boards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUd board can be installed in 0 to 5, 8 to 11, or 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, 8 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board


The DPUd board processes GSM PS services. The DPUd board has 22 logical subsystems. The DPUd board performs the following functions: l l l Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are coded in MCS9 Processes packet links Detects packet faults automatically

6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board. Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the DPUd board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-6 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board. Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board


The technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability. Table 6-7 describes the technical specifications of the DPUd board. Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/ standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 49.40 W 1.26 kg 0C to 45C
97

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term)


Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Processing capability

Specification -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% l Processing the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are coded in MCS9 l Processing in a cell the PS services on up to 48 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are coded in MCS9

6.4 DPUf Board


DPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f. The DPUf board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. Install at least two boards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUf board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUf board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUf board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board


The DPUf board processes GSM voice services. The DPUf board has 48 logical subsystems. The DPUf board performs the following functions: l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding functions if the BTS uses IP transmission. In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding functions if the BTS uses IP or HDLC transmission. l Encodes and decodes voice services In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding functions if the BTS uses TDM transmission. In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUf board in the TCS performs the preceding function.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function. This function is supported only in A over TDM mode. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side. This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.

l l

Provides the voice enhancement function. This function is supported only in A over TDM mode. Detects voice faults automatically

6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board. Figure 6-4 shows the panel of the DPUf board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-8 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board. Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board


The technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability. Table 6-9 describes the technical specifications of the DPUf board. Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 70 W 1.40 kg 0C to 45C
101

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term)


Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Processing capability

Specification -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% l Supporting 1,920 TCHFs l Supporting 7,680 IWF flow numbers in the case of all-IP networking; Supporting 3,840 IWF flow numbers in the case of Abis over TDM or Ater over TDM

6.5 DPUg Board


DPUg refers to Data Processing Unit REV:g. The DPUg board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. Install at least two boards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUg board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUg board can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUg boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUg boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.5.1 Functions of the DPUg Board


The DPUg board processes GSM PS services. The DPUg board has 14 logical subsystems. The DPUg board performs the following functions: l l l Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are coded in MCS9 Processes packet links Detects packet faults automatically

6.5.2 Panel of the DPUg Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUg board. Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the DPUg board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-5 Panel of the DPUg board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-10 describes the LEDs on the DPUg board. Table 6-10 LEDs on the DPUg board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board


The technical specifications of the DPUg board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability. Table 6-11 describes the technical specifications of the DPUg board. Table 6-11 Technical specifications of the DPUg board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 62 W 1.20 kg 0C to 45C
104

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term)


Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Processing capability

Specification -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% l Processing the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are coded in MCS9 l Processing in a cell the PS services on up to 110 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are coded in MCS9

6.6 EIUa Board


EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.6.1 Functions of the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900. The EIUa board performs the following functions: l l l l l l l Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports for TDM transmission Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby EIUa boards Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.6.2 Panel of the EIUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-6 shows the panel of the EIUa board. Figure 6-6 Panel of the EIUa board

6.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board


There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-12 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board. Table 6-12 LEDs on the EIUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
106

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status OFF

Description There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

6.6.4 Ports on the EIUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT port on the EIUa board. Table 6-13 describes the ports on the EIUa board. Table 6-13 Ports on the EIUa board Port E1/T1 (0-7) Function E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals on channels 0-7 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals on channels 8-15 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals on channels 16-23 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals on channels 24-31 Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signal outputs, used to transmit the clock signals obtained from the line clock for system reference Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for testing. Connector Type DB44

E1/T1 (8-15)

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23)

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31)

DB44

2M0 and 2M1

SMB male connector

TESTOUT

SMB male connector

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6. Figure 6-7 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board. Figure 6-7 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board

(2) Bottom plate

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON. l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode. In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF. l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 6-14 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-14 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75ohm Coaxial Cable ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF

S1

Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 0-7 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 8-15 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 16-23 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 24-31 Reserved TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 0-7 TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 8-15 TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 16-23 TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 24-31

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1-4 S3 1-8

ON

OFF

S4

1-8

ON

OFF

S5

1-8

ON

OFF

S6

1-8

ON

OFF

Table 6-15 describes the different DIP switches. Table 6-15 Description of the different DIP switches DIP Switch E1/T1 impedance selection switch Description Used to select the logical transmission mode of the board and to notify the software of the current transmission mode

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

DIP Switch E1/T1 TX ground switch

Description Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end of the E1/T1 signals

NOTE

l l l

The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches on the standby board. The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

6.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board


The technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-16 describes the hardware specifications of the EIUa board. Table 6-16 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/ standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 28.60 W 1.16 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term)

Table 6-17 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-17 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Abis A
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Specification TRX CIC(64K)


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

384 960
110

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Ater Pb CIC(16K) CIC(16K)

Specification 3,840 3,840

6.7 FG2a Board


FG2a is short for 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV: a. The board is optional.The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2a Board


As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet. The FG2a board performs the following functions: l l l l Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE ports Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer Supports the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2a Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board. Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2a board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board

6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 6-18 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board. Table 6-18 LEDs on the FG2a board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s Description The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF

Description The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Green

ON OFF

Green

OFF

Blinking

6.7.4 Ports on the FG2a Board


There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock signal output ports on the FG2a board. Table 6-19 describes the ports on the FG2a board. Table 6-19 Ports on the FG2a board Port FE(1) to FE(3) FE/GE(0) 2M0 and 2M1 Function 10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 10/100M signals 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 10/100/1000M signals Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs Connector Type RJ45 RJ45 SMB male connector

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board


The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-20 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board. Table 6-20 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 38.48 W 1.36 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term)

Table 6-21 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-21 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) Abis A Gb TRX Speech service in the CS domain Maximum payload throughput (physical layer) Specification 600,000 PPS(Packet Per Second) 384 6,144 Erlang 128 Mbit/s 23,000

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports

6.8 FG2c Board


FG2c is short for 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and EPS. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the board is preferentially installed in slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 are occupied, the board can be installed in slots 14, 15.

6.8.1 Functions of the FG2c Board


As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission. The FG2c board performs the following functions: l l l l Provides twelve channels over FE ports or eight channels over FE ports and four channels over GE ports Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE

l The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode. l The FG2c board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter reporting, as well as transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.8.2 Panel of the FG2c Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board. Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the FG2c board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board

6.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 6-22 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board. Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2c board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s Description The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF

Description The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Green

ON OFF

Orange

OFF

Blinking

6.8.4 Ports on the FG2c Board


There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board. Table 6-23 describes the ports on the FG2c board. Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2c board Port 100BASE-T 100/1000BASE-T Function 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M signals 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100/1000M signals Connector Type RJ45 RJ45

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board


The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-24 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board. Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/ standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 85.4 W 1.50 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term)

Table 6-25 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) Abis A Gb TRX Speech service in the CS domain Maximum payload throughput (physical layer) Specification 2,200,000 PPS(Packet Per Second) 2,048 23,040 Erlang 1,024 Mbit/s

6.9 FG2d Board


FG2d refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:d. The FG2d board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the FG2d board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2d board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.9.1 Functions of the FG2d Board


As an interface board, the FG2d board supports IP over Ethernet transmission. The FG2d board performs the following functions: l l l l l Provides twelve channels over FE ports or eight channels over FE ports and four channels over GE ports Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized clock signals Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE

l The FG2d board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode. l The FG2d board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.9.2 Panel of the FG2d Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2d board. Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the FG2d board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-10 Panel of the FG2d board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2d board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 6-26 describes the LEDs on the FG2d board. Table 6-26 LEDs on the FG2d board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port) Green ON OFF Orange OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Blinking

6.9.4 Ports on the FG2d Board


There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2d board. Table 6-27 describes the ports on the FG2d board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-27 Ports on the FG2d board Port 100BASE-T 100/1000BASE-T Function 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M signals 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100/1000M signals Connector Type RJ45 RJ45

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Board


The technical specifications of the FG2d board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-28 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2d board. Table 6-28 Hardware specifications of the FG2d board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/ standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 85.4 W 1.50 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term)

Table 6-29 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-29 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) Abis
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Specification 2,200,000 PPS(Packet Per Second) 1,536


122

TRX
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Session setup/release times A Speech service in the CS domain Session setup/release times Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical layer)

Specification 5000/s 23,040 Erlang 5000/s 512 Mbit/s 129000

Number of UDP(User Datagram Protocol) ports

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service. l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an A/Abisinterface board.

6.10 GCUa and GCGa Board


GCUa is short for General Clock Unit REV: a. GCGa is short for General Clock Unit with GPS REV: a. The GCUa or GCGa board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed on the BSC6900. The boards must be installed in slots 12 and 13 in the MPS.

6.10.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function. The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions: l Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from the synchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signals and the reference clock for the entire system Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clock Generates RFN signals for the system Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clock phase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phase in the case of active/standby switchover. Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPS card. (Only the GCGa board supports this function.)

l l l

6.10.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board. Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-11 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board

6.10.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-30 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board. Table 6-30 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s Description The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF

Description The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

6.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board. Table 6-31 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board. Table 6-31 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board Port ANT Function Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGa board is used to receive the timing signals and positioning information from the GPS satellite. This port is not used on the GCUa board. Ports for providing synchronization clock signals. The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signals and 1PPS clock signals. Serial port, which receives only commissioning data and discards all other data automatically. Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are used for testing. Input port for testing external clock signals Input port for BITS clock signals and line clock signals Connector Type SMA male connector

CLKOUT0 to CLKOUT9 COM0 COM1 TESTOUT TESTIN CLKIN0 and CLKIN1

RJ45

RJ45 RJ45 SMB male connector SMB male connector SMB male connector

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade. Table 6-32 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board. Table 6-32 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% Grade three

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Clock accuracy grade

6.11 GOUa Board


GOUa is short for 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV: a. The GOUa board is optional. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.11.1 Functions of the GOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet. The GOUa board performs the following functions: l
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

l l

Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Supports the A and Abis interfaces

6.11.2 Panel of the GOUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board. Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the GOUa board. Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUa board

6.11.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-33 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-33 LEDs on the GOUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

6.11.4 Ports on the GOUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board. Table 6-34 describes the ports on the GOUa board. Table 6-34 Ports on the GOUa board Port RX TX 2M0 and 2M1 Function Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port, and RX refers to the receiving optical port. Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs Connector Type LC/PC

SMB male connector

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board


The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-35 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board Item Dimensions Power supply Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (longterm) Relative humidity (short-term) Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 37.30 W 1.20 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) Abis TRX Session setup/release times A Speech service in the CS domain Session setup/release times Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports Specification 600,000 PPS(Packet Per Second) 384 500/s 6,144 Erlang 500/s 23,000

NOTE

The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Abis/Ainterface board.

Table 6-37 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports Item Specification Optical transceiver, GE, Single-Mode Mode Connector type Center wavelength Operating data rate Typical transmission distance Max output optical power Min output optical power Saturation optical power Receiver sensitivity Single mode LC/PC 1,310 nm 1.25 Gbit/s 10 km Optical transceiver, GE, Multi-Mode Multi-mode LC/PC 850 nm 1.25 Gbit/s 0.5 km

-3 dBm -9 dBm -3 dBm -20 dBm

-2.5 dBm -9.5 dBm 0 dBm -17 dBm

6.12 GOUc Board


GOUc is short for 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV :c. The board is optional. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the board is preferentially installed in slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 are occupied, the board can be installed in slots 14, 15.

6.12.1 Functions of the GOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission. The GOUc board performs the following functions: l l l Provides four channels over GE ports Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

6 Boards

l The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode. l The GOUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter reporting, as well as transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.12.2 Panel of the GOUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board. Figure 6-13 shows the panel of the GOUc board. Figure 6-13 Panel of the GOUc board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.12.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED), and ACT (optical port LED). Table 6-38 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board. Table 6-38 LEDs on the GOUc board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (optical port LED) ACT (optical port LED) Green ON OFF Green OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Blinking

6.12.4 Ports on the GOUc Board


There are four optical ports on the GOUc board. Table 6-39 describes the ports on the GOUc board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-39 Ports on the GOUc board Port RX TX Function Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port, and RX refers to the receiving optical port. Connector Type LC/PC

6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board


The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-40 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board. Table 6-40 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board Item Dimensions Power supply Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (longterm) Relative humidity (short-term) Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 65.90 W 1.40 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Table 6-41 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-41 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) Abis
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Specification 2,200,000 PPS(Packet Per Second) 2,048


133

TRX
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Session setup/release times A Speech service in the CS domain Session setup/release times Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical layer)

Specification 3,000/s 23,040 Erlang 5,000/s 1,024 Mbit/s 129,000

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports

NOTE

The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Abis/A-interface board.

Table 6-42 describes the specifications of the optical ports. Table 6-42 Specifications of the optical ports Item Specification Optical transceiver, GE, Single-Mode Mode Connector type Center wavelength Operating data rate Typical transmission distance Max output optical power Min output optical power Saturation optical power Receiver sensitivity Single mode LC/PC 1,310 nm 1.25 Gbit/s 10 km Optical transceiver, GE, Multi-Mode Multi-mode LC/PC 850 nm 1.25 Gbit/s 0.5 km

-3 dBm -9 dBm -3 dBm -20 dBm

-2.5 dBm -9.5 dBm 0 dBm -17 dBm

6.13 GOUd Board


GOUd refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:d. The GOUd board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and EPS. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the board can be installed in slots 4, 5 and 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the board is preferentially installed in slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 are occupied, the board can be installed in slots 4, 5 and 14, 15.

6.13.1 Functions of the GOUd Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUd board supports IP over Ethernet transmission. The GOUd board performs the following functions: l l l Provides four channels over GE ports Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE

l The GOUd board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode. l The GOUd board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.13.2 Panel of the GOUd Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUd board. Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the GOUd board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-14 Panel of the GOUd board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED), and ACT (optical port LED). Table 6-43 describes the LEDs on the GOUd board. Table 6-43 LEDs on the GOUd board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (optical port LED) ACT (optical port LED) Green ON OFF Green OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Blinking

6.13.4 Ports on the GOUd Board


There are four optical ports on the GOUd board. Table 6-44 describes the ports on the GOUd board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-44 Ports on the GOUd board Port RX TX Function Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port, and RX refers to the receiving optical port. Connector Type LC/PC

6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board


The technical specifications of the GOUd board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-45 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUd board. Table 6-45 Hardware specifications of the GOUd board Item Dimensions Power supply Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (longterm) Relative humidity (short-term) Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 65.90 W 1.40 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Table 6-46 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-46 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) Abis
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Specification 2,200,000 PPS(Packet Per Second) 1,535


138

TRX
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item A Gb Speech service in the CS domain Maximum payload throughput (physical layer)

Specification 23,040 Erlang 512 Mbit/s

NOTE

The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

Table 6-47 describes the specifications of the optical ports. Table 6-47 Specifications of the optical ports Item Specification Optical transceiver, GE, Single-Mode Mode Connector type Center wavelength Operating data rate Typical transmission distance Max output optical power Min output optical power Saturation optical power Receiver sensitivity Single mode LC/PC 1,310 nm 1.25 Gbit/s 10 km Optical transceiver, GE, Multi-Mode Multi-mode LC/PC 850 nm 1.25 Gbit/s 0.5 km

-3 dBm -9 dBm -3 dBm -20 dBm

-2.5 dBm -9.5 dBm 0 dBm -17 dBm

6.14 MDMC Board


MDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in the common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one MDMC board.

6.14.1 Functions of the MDMC Board


The MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

The MDMC board performs the following functions: l l l l l l l Detects the voltage of two -48 V power inputs Detects one output of external temperature sensor Detects one output of external humidity sensor Detects two lightning protection circuits Detects the status of the power switches for six power outputs Provides audible and visual alarms Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, so as to report the working status of the power distribution box and exchange operation & maintenance (O&M) information

6.14.2 Panel of the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board. Figure 6-15 shows the panel of the MDMC board. Figure 6-15 Panel of the MDMC board

(1) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated. l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is faulty. l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when it is faulty.

6.14.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM. Table 6-48 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-48 LEDs on the MDMC board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s OFF Description The MDMC board is functional and communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board properly. The MDMC board is not working or it does not communicate with the SCUa/ SCUb board properly. The power supply to the MDMC board is abnormal or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm. The power distribution box is faulty. During the self-check of the MDMC board, however, the ALM LED is also ON. This indicates that the ALM LED is functional.

ALM

Red

OFF ON

6.14.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board


The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch. Figure 6-16 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board. Figure 6-16 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board. To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 6-49. Table 6-49 DIP switch on the MDMC board Address 0 Bit 1 (the most significant bit) 2
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Setting of DIP Bit ON ON

Description 0 0
141

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Address

Bit 3 4 (the least significant bit)

Setting of DIP Bit ON ON

Description 0 0

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 6-49.

6.15 OIUa Board


OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS/ TCS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.15.1 Functions of the OIUa Board


The OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces. The OIUa board performs the following functions: l l l l l l l Provides one STM-1 port for TDM transmission Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and standby OIUa boards Provides one channelized STM-1 Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.15.2 Panel of the OIUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board. Figure 6-17 shows the panel of the OIUa board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-17 Panel of the OIUa board

6.15.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board


There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. Table 6-50 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board. Table 6-50 LEDs on the OIUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
143

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED ALM

Color Red

Status OFF ON or blinking

Description There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The STM-1 port does not receive signals properly. The STM-1 port receives signals properly.

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LOS

Green

ON OFF

6.15.4 Ports on the OIUa Board


There is one optical port, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT port on the OIUa board. Table 6-51 describes the ports on the OIUa board. Table 6-51 Ports on the OIUa board Port Function Connect or Type Multiple xing E1 Port Number 0 to 62 Multiple xing T1 Port Number 0 to 83

RX TX 2M0 and 2M1

Receiving optical port Transmitting optical port Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signal outputs, used to transmit the clock signals obtained from the line clock for system reference. Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for testing.

LC

SMB male connector

TESTO UT

SMB male connector

6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board


The technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-52 describes the hardware specifications of the OIUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-52 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board Item Dimensions Power supply Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (longterm) Relative humidity (short-term) Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 20.80 W 0.94 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Table 6-53 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-53 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Abis A Ater Pb TRX CIC(64K) CIC(16K) CIC(16K) Specification 384 1,920 7,168 7,168

NOTE

The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

Table 6-54 describes the specifications of the optical ports. Table 6-54 Specifications of the optical ports Item Specification Optical transceiver, STM-1, Single-Mode Mode
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Optical transceiver, STM-1, Multi-Mode Multi-mode


145

Single mode
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification Optical transceiver, STM-1, Single-Mode Optical transceiver, STM-1, Multi-Mode LC/PC 1,310 nm 155 Mbit/s 2 km

Connector type Center wavelength Operating data rate Typical transmission distance Max output optical power Min output optical power Saturation optical power Receiver sensitivity

LC/PC 1,310 nm 155 Mbit/s 15km

-8 dBm -15 dBm -8 dBm -31 dBm

-14 dBm -19 dBm -14 dBm -301 dBm

6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board


OMUa is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:b. Two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in the BSC6900. One OMUa/OMUb board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. It is recommended that the OMUa/OMUb board be installed in slots 20 to 23 for inventory sites and in slots 24 to 27 for new sites.
NOTE

l This document describes the installation of other boards based on the OMUa/OMUb boards being installed in slots 24 to 27. l Different types of OMU boards can be configured in active and standby slots only for a short period. When an OMUc board is used to replace an OMUa/OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa/OMUb board can be inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period (less than one hour), so that data can be synchronized from the OMUa/OMUb board to the OMUc board. l Different types of OMU boards cannot be configured in active and standby slots for a long period. In scenarios of long-term operation, the active and standby OMU boards must be of the same type. For example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

6.16.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board


The OMUa/OMUb board connects the LMT/M2000 and the other boards in the BSC6900. The functions of the OMUa/OMUb board are as follows:

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

l l

Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management, security management, and loading management functions for the system Enables LMT or M2000 users to perform operation and maintenance on the BSC6900 system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa board of the BSC6900

6.16.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, there are hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board. Figure 6-18 shows the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. Figure 6-18 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (5) ALM LED (9) USB port (6) ACT LED (10) ETH0 Ethernet port

(3) Self-locking latch (7) RESET button

(4) RUN LED (8) SHUTDOWN button

(11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


(13) COM port (17) Hard disks (14) VGA port (18) Screws for securing the hard disk (15) HD LEDs

6 Boards
(16) OFFLINE LED

NOTE

l To power off the OMUa/OMUb board, simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away from the front panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off the power switch. l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in an emergency. l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works the same way as the reset button on a PC. l Pressing the SHUTDOWN or RESET button may scratch the surface of OMUa hard disks. Avoid pressing these two buttons whenever possible.

6.16.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD. Table 6-55 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board. Table 6-55 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF OFFLINE Blue ON OFF ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s HD Green OFF Blinking Description The board is functional. The board is being started. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode, or the board is disconnected. The board can be removed. The board cannot be removed. The board is being switched over to the other working mode. There is no read or write operation on the hard disk. The hard disk is being read or written to.
148

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one VGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board. Table 6-56 describes the ports on the OMUa/OMUb board. Table 6-56 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb board Port USB0-1 and USB2-3 Function Operators can use the USB ports only after logging in to the operating system (OS) running on the board. The ports does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. The hardware ports are used for the communication between the OMU and the LMT/M2000. The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. The hardware port needs no cables for it does not communicate with other equipment. Video port Connector Type USB

ETH0 to ETH1

RJ45

ETH2

RJ45

COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC

DB9

VGA

DB15

6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board


This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board, including dimensions, power supply, number of CPUs, power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes


Table 6-57 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-57 Hardware configuration indexes Item Dimensions Power supply Index of the OMUa board 248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 4 120 W 4.0 kg 73 GB or above x 2 (RAID 1)
*

Index of the OMUb board 248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 2 90 W 3.5 kg 73 GB or above x 2 (RAID 1)
*

Number of CPUs Power consumption Weight Hard disk capacity Memory capacity Temperature required when working for an extended period of time Temperature required when working for a short period of time Relative humidity required when working for an extended period of time Relative humidity required when working for a short period of time

2G 5C to 40C

2G 5C to 40C

0C to 50C

0C to 50C

5% to 85%

5% to 85%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

*The hard disk capacity can be 73 GB, 146 GB, or 300 GB. Hard disks will be delivered according

to the production plan of our hard disk providers.

Performance Counters
Table 6-58 lists the performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board. Table 6-58 Performance counters Counter Number of recorded alarms Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Counter Time when the standby OMU data is synchronized with the active OMU data Duration of the synchronization between the active OMU files and standby OMU files Duration of the switchover between the active and standby OMUs Duration of the OMU restart

Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active OMU board every second.

Seven minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.

Refers to the time from the request for OMU switchover being accepted to the switchover being finished. The switchover finishes in four minutes. Duration of the OMU restart caused by an OMU fault. This duration lasts for about three minutes.

The OMUa/OMUb board contains mechanical hard disk. Adverse environments, such as high temperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan. To extend the lifespan of the OMUa/OMUb board, protect it from vibration, shock, and abnormal shutdowns.

6.17 OMUc Board


OMUc is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV: c. Two boards must be configured in the BSC6900. The boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.
NOTE

l This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUc boards are installed in slots 24 and 25. l Different types of OMU boards can be configured in active and standby slots only for a short period. When an OMUc board is used to replace an OMUa/OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa/OMUb board can be inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period (less than one hour), so that data can be synchronized from the OMUa/OMUb board to the OMUc board. l Different types of OMU boards cannot be configured in active and standby slots for a long period. In scenarios of long-term operation, the active and standby OMU boards must be of the same type. For example, both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

6.17.1 Functions of the OMUc Board


The OMUc board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900. The OMUc board performs the following functions: l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management, security management, and loading management functions for the system
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Enables LMT or M2000 users to perform operation and maintenance on the BSC6900 system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUb board of the BSC6900

6.17.2 Panel of the OMUc Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUc board. Figure 6-19 shows the panel of the OMUc board. Figure 6-19 Panel of the OMUc board

(1) Captive screw

(2) Ejector lever

(3) Self-locking latch

(4) RUN LED

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


(5) ALM LED (9) OFL LED (13) VGA port (6) ACT LED (10) COM port (14) USB port (7) POWER Button (11) ETH0 Ethernet port (15) ETH2 Ethernet port (8) HDD LED

6 Boards

(12) ETH1 Ethernet port

NOTE

To power off the OMUc board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away from the front panel of the OMUc board. After the OFL (OFFLINE) LED is on, turn off the power switch.

6.17.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD. Table 6-59 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board. Table 6-59 LEDs on the OMUc board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF OFL Blue ON OFF ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s HDD Green OFF Blinking Description The board is functional. The board is being started. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode, or the board is disconnected. The board can be removed. The board cannot be removed. The board is being switched over to the other working mode. There is no read or write operation on the hard disk. The hard disk is being read or written to.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0, and one VGA port on the OMUc board. Table 6-60 describes the ports on the OMUc board. Table 6-60 Ports on the OMUc board Port USB0-1 and USB2-3 Function Operators can use the USB ports only after logging in to the operating system (OS) running on the board. The hardware ports need no cables or connecting to other equipment and thereby do not affect the equipment safety. The hardware ports are used for the communication between the OMU and the LMT/M2000. The hardware ports need no cables or connecting to other equipment and thereby do not affect the equipment safety. The hardware port needs no cables for it does not communicate with other equipment. Port for the video. Connector Type USB

ETH0 to ETH1

RJ45

ETH2

RJ45

COM

DB9

VGA

DB15

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board


The technical specifications of the OMUc board include hardware configuration indexes and performance counters. The hardware configuration indexes refer to the dimensions, power supply, number of CPUs, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes


Table 6-61 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board. Table 6-61 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board Item Dimensions Index of the OMUc board 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Power supply Number of CPUs Power consumption Weight Hard disk capacity Memory capacity Temperature required when working for an extended period of time Temperature required when working for a short period of time Relative humidity required when working for an extended period of time Relative humidity required when working for a short period of time

Index of the OMUc board Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 6 90 W 2.5 kg 500 GB 8 GB 5C to 40C

0C to 50C

5% to 85%

5% to 95%

Performance Counters
Table 6-62 describes the performance counters of the OMUc board. Table 6-62 Performance counters of the OMUc board Item Number of recorded alarms Time when the standby OMU data is synchronized with the active OMU data Duration of the synchronization between the active OMU files and standby OMU files Index of the OMUc board The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000. The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active OMU board every second.

Seven minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Duration of the switchover between the active and standby OMUs Duration of the OMU restart

Index of the OMUc board Refers to the time from the request for OMU switchover being accepted to the switchover being finished. The switchover finishes in four minutes. Duration of the OMU restart caused by an OMU fault. This duration lasts for about three minutes.

The OMUc board contains a mechanical hard disk. Due to the short lifespan of the mechanical hard disk, the lifespan of the OMUc board is about 5 years. Adverse environments, such as high temperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan. To ensure the lifespan of the OMUc board, the OMUc board must be protected against vibration, shock and abnormal shutdown.

6.18 PAMU Board


PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU board.

6.18.1 Functions of the PAMU Board


The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900 cabinet. The PAMU board performs the following functions: l l l l Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarms Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarms Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports

6.18.2 Panel of the PAMU Board


On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch. Figure 6-20 shows the panel of the PAMU board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-20 Panel of the PAMU board

(1) RUN LED

(2) ALM LED

(3) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated. l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is faulty. l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when it is faulty.

6.18.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM. Table 6-63 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board. Table 6-63 LEDs on the PAMU board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s Description The PAMU board is functional and communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board properly. The PAMU board is faulty or it does not communicate with the SCUa/SCUb board properly.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status OFF

Description The power supply to the PAMU board is abnormal or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm. The power distribution box is faulty. During the self-check of the PAMU board, however, the ALM LED is also ON. This indicates that the ALM LED is functional.

ALM

Red

OFF ON

6.18.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch. Figure 6-21 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board. Figure 6-21 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board. To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table 6-64. Table 6-64 DIP switch on the PAMU board Address 0 Bit 1 (the most significant bit) 2 3 4 (the least significant bit) Setting of DIP Bit ON ON ON ON Description 0 0 0 0

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

6 Boards

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-64.

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board


The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, and weight. Table 6-65 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board. Table 6-65 Technical specifications of the PAMU board Item Dimensions Power supply Power consumption Weight Specification 340 mm 72 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode 15 W 0.2 kg

6.19 PEUa Board


PEUa is short for 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV: a. The PEUa board is optional.The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.19.1 Functions of the PEUa Board


As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission. The PEUa board performs the following functions: l l l l Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1 Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP links Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa boards Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Supports the Abis and Gb , and A interfaces

6.19.2 Panel of the PEUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board. Figure 6-22 shows the panel of the PEUa board. Figure 6-22 Panel of the PEUa board

6.19.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-66 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board. Table 6-66 LEDs on the PEUa board LED RUN
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Color Green

Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

Description The board is functional.


160

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF

Description The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

6.19.4 Ports on the PEUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board. Table 6-67 describes the ports on the PEUa board. Table 6-67 Ports on the PEUa board Port E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 (24-31) 2M0 and 2M1 Function E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals on channels 0-7 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals on channels 8-15 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals on channels 16-23 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals on channels 24-31 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs Connector Type DB44 DB44 DB44 DB44 SMB male connector

6.19.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. Figure 6-23 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-23 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board

(2) Bottom plate

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

6 Boards

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed. l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-23, there are two square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the subboard, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-23 is to turn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to OFF, turn them inwards. l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced mode. l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-68 describes the DIP switches on the PEUa board. Table 6-68 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board DIP Switc h S2 Bit Description Setting of DIP Switch ON Meaning

1-8

TX ground switch of E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode Setting the working mode to other modes Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode Setting the working mode to other modes Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode
163

OFF

S4

1-8

TX ground switch of E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

ON

OFF

S6

1-8

TX ground switch of E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

DIP Switc h

Bit

Description

Setting of DIP Switch OFF

Meaning

Setting the working mode to other modes Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode Setting the working mode to other modes Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode Setting the working mode to E1 balanced mode Setting the working mode to T1 mode Setting the working mode to J1 mode

S8

1-8

TX ground switch of E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

ON

OFF

S10

1-2

DIP switch for setting the working mode, consisting of two bits

(ON, ON)

(OFF, ON)

(ON, OFF)

(OFF, OFF)

6.19.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board


The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-69 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board. Table 6-69 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term)

Specification 27.53 W 1.30 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95%

Table 6-70 describes the specifications of the board processing capability. Table 6-70 Specifications of the board processing capability Item Abis Gb A TRX Maximum payload throughput (physical layer) CIC (64K) Specification 384 64 Mbit/s 6144

6.20 PFCU Board


PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each fan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.20.1 Functions of the PFCU Board


The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box. The PFCU board performs the following functions: l l l l l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the LED Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, to report the working status of the fan box Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan speed Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.20.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-24 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board. Figure 6-24 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in Table 6-71. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1. Table 6-71 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack) DIP Switch SW1 Bit 1 (the least significant bit) 2 3 4 (the most significant bit) Setting of DIP Switch OFF ON ON ON Description 1 0 0 0

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-25 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board. Figure 6-25 DIP switch on the PFCU board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in Table 6-72. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the address of the PFCU board is 4. Table 6-72 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack) DIP Switch SW1 Bit 1 (the least significant bit) 2 3 4 (the most significant bit) Setting of DIP Switch ON ON OFF ON Description 0 0 1 0

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.20.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board


The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range, frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment. Table 6-73 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board. Table 6-73 Technical specifications of the PFCU board Item Dimensions Input voltage range Frequency of PWM signals Detectable temperature range Requirement for fan speed adjustment Specification 270 mm x 35 mm -40 V DC to -57 V DC 1 kHz -5C to +55C(basic requirement) The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55% to 100% of the full speed.

6.21 POUc Board


POUc refers to 4-port TDM/IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, or TCS. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. When the MPS/EPS/TCS is configured with the SCUa board. For the MPS/ EPS/TCS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23. When the MPS/EPS/ TCS is configured with the SCUb board, the POUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.21.1 Functions of the POUc Board


As an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission. The POUc board performs the following functions: l l l l l Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on TDM/IP protocol Supports the PPP function Extracts line clock signals Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and standby POUc boards Supports the A, Abis, Gb, Ater, and Pb interfaces
NOTE

The POUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. These two CPUs perform different functions when the ports on the POUc board use different transmission modes. l When the ports on the POUc board use IP transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmission port management and maintenance, and CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows. l When the ports on the POUc board use TDM transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management plane and control plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, transmission port management and maintenance, as well as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows, and CPU1 mainly processes the signaling according to the MTP2 and Ater SL protocols.

6.21.2 Panel of the POUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board. Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the POUc board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-26 Panel of the POUc board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.21.3 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. Table 6-74 describes the LEDs on the POUc board. Table 6-74 LEDs on the POUc board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LOS Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The STM-1 port does not receive signals properly. The STM-1 port receives signals properly.

6.21.4 Ports on the POUc Board


There are four optical ports on the POUc board. Table 6-75 describes the ports on the POUc board. Table 6-75 Ports on the POUc board Port Num ber 0 Port Function Connector Type LC/PC Multiplexing E1 Port Number 0 to 62 Multiplexing T1 Port Number 0 to 83

RX TX

Receiving optical port Transmitting optical port

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Port Num ber 1

Port

Function

Connector Type LC/PC

Multiplexing E1 Port Number 63 to 125

Multiplexing T1 Port Number 84 to 167

RX TX

Receiving optical port Transmitting optical port Receiving optical port Transmitting optical port Receiving optical port Transmitting optical port

RX TX

LC/PC

126 to 188

168 to 251

RX TX

LC/PC

189 to 251

252 to 335

6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board


The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity. Table 6-76 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board. Table 6-76 Hardware specifications of the POUc board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 77.25 W 1.50 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85%

Power consumption Weight Temperature required when working for a long time Temperature required when working for a short time Relative humidity required when working for a long time

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Relative humidity required when working for a short time

Specification 5% to 95%

Table 6-77 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission mode. Table 6-77 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission mode Item Specification with the DPUc Board Configured TRX CIC (64K) CIC (16K) CIC (16K) Maximum payload throughput (physical layer) 512 3906 7168 7168 504 Mbit/s Specification with the DPUf Board Configured 512 7680 7168 7168 504 Mbit/s

Abis A Ater Pb Gb

NOTE

When the A interface is carried by the POUc board, the POUc board supports a maximum of 3906 CICs if the DPUf and DPUc boards are configured in the same subrack where the POUc board is installed. When the A interface is carried by the POUc board, the POUc board supports a maximum of 7680 CICs if the following conditions are met: l At least four DPUf boards are configured in the same subrack where the POUc board is installed. l The POUc board and at least four DPUf boards are managed by the same main control XPUa/XPUb board. The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

Table 6-78 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission mode. Table 6-78 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission mode Item Abis A Ater TRX Speech service in the CS domain CIC (16K) Specification 2048 23,040 Erlang 23,040 (The TC subrack supports only 13,000 CICs.)

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-79 describes the specifications of the optical ports. Table 6-79 Specifications of the optical ports Item Specification Optical transceiver, STM-1, Single-Mode Mode Connector type Center wavelength Operating data rate Typical transmission distance Max output optical power Min output optical power Saturation optical power Receiver sensitivity Single mode LC/PC 1,310 nm 155 Mbit/s 15km Optical transceiver, STM-1, Multi-Mode Multi-mode LC/PC 1,310 nm 155 Mbit/s 2 km

-8 dBm -15 dBm -8 dBm -31 dBm

-14 dBm -19 dBm -14 dBm -301 dBm

6.22 SCUa Board


SCUa is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: a. The SCUa board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed in the subrack. The boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

6.22.1 Functions of the SCUa Board


The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900. The SCUa board performs the following functions: l l l l l l
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Provides the maintenance management function Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900 Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet Supports the port trunking function Supports the active/standby switchover Enables inter-subrack connections
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

l l

Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.22.2 Panel of the SCUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board. Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the SCUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-27 Panel of the SCUa board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 6-80 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board. Table 6-80 LEDs on the SCUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port) Green ON OFF Green OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Blinking

6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board


There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one CLKIN port, and one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board. Table 6-81 describes the ports on the SCUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-81 Ports on the SCUa board Port 10/100/100 0BASE-T0 to 10/100/100 0BASE-T9 10/100/100 0BASET10 and 10/100/100 0BASET11 COM Function 10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, used for the intersubrack connection. Connector Type RJ45

10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, the two ports are not used in the BSC6900.

RJ45

The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8 kHz clock signals from the GCUa board. Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for testing.

RJ45

CLKIN TESTOUT

RJ45 SMB male connector

6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board


The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity. Table 6-82 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board. Table 6-82 Technical specifications of the SCUa board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 54.5 W 1.2 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85%
177

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term)
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Relative humidity (short-term) Switching capacity

Specification 5% to 95% 60 Gbit/s

Figure 6-28 shows the switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUa boards. Figure 6-28 Switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUa boards

NOTE

If only one SCUa board is functioning in the subrack, the switching bandwidth of each slot reduces by half.

6.23 SCUb Board


SCUb is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: b. The SCUb board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed in the subrack. The boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
NOTE

SCUa and SCUb boards cannot be simultaneously installed in slot 6 and slot 7 of the same subrack. SCUa and SCUb boards can be simultaneously installed in two subracks of the same or different cabinets. For example, two SCUa boards are installed in subrack 0, and two SCUb boards are installed in subrack 1. The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.23.1 Functions of the SCUb Board


The SCUb board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between all modules of the BSC6900. The SCUb board performs the following functions: l l l l l l l l Provides the maintenance management function Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900 Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet Supports the port trunking function Supports the active/standby switchover Enables inter-subrack connections Provides a total switching capacity of 240 Gbit/s Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.23.2 Panel of the SCUb Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUb board. Figure 6-29 shows the panel of the SCUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-29 Panel of the SCUb board

6.23.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port. Table 6-83 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board. Table 6-83 LEDs on the SCUb board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s Description The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF

Description The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Green

ON OFF

Green

OFF

Blinking 10G LINK Green ON OFF

6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board


There are 15 ports on the SCUb board. Table 6-84 describes the ports on the SCUb board. Table 6-84 Ports on the SCUb board Label 10/100/100 0BASE-T0 to 10/100/100 0BASE-T5 Function 10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, used for the intersubrack connection. Connector RJ45

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Label 10/100/100 0BASE-T6 and 10/100/100 0BASE-T7 10G-T8 to 10G-T11

Function 10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, the two ports are not used in the BSC6900.

Connector RJ45

10 Gbit/s Ethernet ports, used for the inter-subrack connection. l These ports can be interconnected using SFP+ HighSpeed cables. l These ports can be interconnected using multi-mode optical cables.

l When these ports are interconnect ed using SFP+ HighSpeed cables, the SFP+ connectors are used. l When these ports are interconnect ed using multi-mode optical cables, the LC or PC connectors are used.

COM

The port does not require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected. Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8 kHz clock signals from the GCUa board. Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for testing.

RJ45

CLKIN TESTOUT

RJ45 SMB male connector

6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board


The technical specifications of the SCUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capability. Table 6-85 describes the technical specifications of the SCUb board. Table 6-85 Technical specifications of the SCUb board Item Dimensions Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Input Power

Specification Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply. 78 W 1.5 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% 240 Gbit/s

Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Switching capacity

Figure 6-30 shows the switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUb boards. Figure 6-30 Switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUb boards

NOTE

If only one SCUb board is functioning in the subrack, the switching bandwidth of each slot reduces by half. The switching bandwidth of a slot does not change when the SCUb boards are interconnected using SFP+ highspeed cables or optical cables.

Table 6-86 describes the technical specifications of the optical ports.


Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-86 Specifications of the optical ports Item Mode Connector type Center wavelength Operating data rate Typical transmission distance Max output optical power Min output optical power Saturation optical power Receiver sensitivity Optical Transceiver, 10GE, Multi-Mode Multi mode LC/PC 850 nm 10.3125 Gbit/s 0.3 km -1 dBm -7.3 dBm -1 dBm -11.1 dBm

6.24 TNUa Board


TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. In a BSC6900 using the Abis over IP and A over IP mode, the TNUa boards do not need to be configured. In a BSC6900 using other modes, install two TNUa boards in slots 4 and 5 of the MPS, EPS, and TCS.

6.24.1 Functions of the TNUa Board


The TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CS services of the entire system. The TNUa board performs the following functions: l l Provides 128K x 128K time slots TDM switching Allocates the TDM network resources

6.24.2 Panel of the TNUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board. Figure 6-31 shows the panel of the TNUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-31 Panel of the TNUa board

6.24.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board


There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 6-87 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board. Table 6-87 LEDs on the TNUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status OFF

Description There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

6.24.4 Ports on the TNUa Board


There are six TDM ports on the TNUa board. Table 6-88 describes the ports on the TNUa board. Table 6-88 Ports on the TNUa board Port TDM0 to TDM5 Function TDM high-speed serial ports, used to connect the TNUa boards in different subracks Connector Type DB14

NOTE

The BSC6900 supports the inter-TNUa connections between the MPS and the EPS. It also supports the inter-TNUa connections between the TCSs.

6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board


The technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity and processing capability. Table 6-89 describes the technical specifications of the TNUa board. Table 6-89 Technical specifications of the TNUa board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/ standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Power consumption Weight Temperature required when working for a long time Temperature required when working for a short time Relative humidity required when working for a long time Relative humidity required when working for a short time Processing capability

Specification 31.20 W 1.00 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% One TNUa board provides 4K LVDS switching capability for each slot in the subrack. When two TNUa boards are installed in the subrack, the switching capacity remains 4k LVDS per slot.

6.25 XPUa Board


XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS. l The XPUa board cannot be configured in slot 24 or slot 25 of MPS.

6.25.1 Functions of the XPUa Board


Loaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUa board and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage the GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is used to process the GSM services on the control plane.
NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an XPUa board: l If Logical function type is set to RGCP, the XPUa board serves as a main control XPUa board. l If Logical function type is set to GCP, the XPUa board serves as a non-main control XPUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Main Control XPUa Board


The main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems. Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the system. The functions are described as follows: l l l l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources between subracks Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load information on the control planes between subracks Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSIRNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control XPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows: l l l l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces Processing transport layer signaling Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and establishing signaling and service connections Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUa Board


The non-main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems. The four subsystems of the non-main control XPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows: l l l l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces Processing transport layer signaling Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and establishing signaling and service connections Processing RFN signaling

6.25.2 Panel of the XPUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board. Figure 6-32 shows the panel of the XPUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-32 Panel of the XPUa board

6.25.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 6-90 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board. Table 6-90 LEDs on the XPUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status OFF

Description There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Green

ON OFF

Green

OFF Blinking

6.25.4 Ports on the XPUa Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board. Table 6-91 describes the ports on the XPUa board. Table 6-91 Ports on the XPUa board Port 10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10/100/1000BASE-T3 Function 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports Connector Type RJ45

6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board


The technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability. Table 6-92 describes the technical specifications of the XPUa board. Table 6-92 Technical specifications of the XPUa board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Processing capability of the main control XPUa board Processing capability of the non-main control XPUa board

Specification 75.4 W 1.6 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% Supporting 270 TRXs, 270 cells, 270 BTSs, and 492,000 Max equivalent BHCAs (Busy Hour Call Attempts) Supporting 360 TRXs, 360 cells, 360 BTSs, and 656,000 Max equivalent BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.26 XPUb Board


XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS. l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS. l The XPUb board cannot be configured in slot 24 or slot 25 of MPS.

6.26.1 Functions of the XPUb Board


Loaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUb board and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage the GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is used to process the GSM services on the control plane.
NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an XPUb board: l If Logical function type is set to RGCP, the XPUb board serves as a main control XPUb board. l If Logical function type is set to GCP, the XPUb board serves as a non-main control XPUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Main Control XPUb Board


The main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems. Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the system. The functions are described as follows: l l l l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources between subracks Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load information on the control planes between subracks Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSIRNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control XPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows: l l l l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces Processing transport layer signaling Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and establishing signaling and service connections Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUb Board


The non-main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems. The eight subsystems of the non-main control XPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows: l l l l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces Processing transport layer signaling Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and establishing signaling and service connections Processing RFN signaling

6.26.2 Panel of the XPUb Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board. Figure 6-33 shows the panel of the XPUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-33 Panel of the XPUb board

6.26.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 6-93 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board. Table 6-93 LEDs on the XPUb board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status OFF

Description There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Green

ON OFF

Orange

OFF Blinking

6.26.4 Ports on the XPUb Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUb board. Table 6-94 describes the ports on the XPUb board. Table 6-94 Ports on the XPUb board Port 10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10/100/1000BASE-T3 Function 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports Connector Type RJ45

6.26.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board


The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability. Table 6-95 describes the technical specifications of the XPUb board. Table 6-95 Technical specifications of the XPUb board Item Dimensions Power supply Specification 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item Power consumption Weight Operating temperature (long-term) Operating temperature (short-term) Relative humidity (long-term) Relative humidity (short-term) Processing capability of the main control XPUb board Processing capability of the non-main control XPUb board

Specification 52.3 W 1.2 kg 0C to 45C -5C to +55C 5% to 85% 5% to 95% Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and 1,050,000 Max equivalent BHCAs (Busy Hour Call Attempts) Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and 1,050,000 Max equivalent BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.27 WOPB Board


WOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.

6.27.1 Functions of the WOPB Board


The WOPB board provides the power surge protection function. The WOPB board performs the following functions: l l Suppresses differential mode power surge Suppresses common mode power surge

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

7
About This Chapter

Cables

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet. 7.1 Power Cables The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables. 7.2 PGND Cables The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory. 7.3 Optical Cable The optical cable is used to connect the optical interface board to the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs, or to interconnect SCUa boards. It is optional in the BSC6900 and the number of optical cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. 7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler) The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/ combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or split one input into two. 7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk signals. 7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals. 7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals. 7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/ T1 signals. 7.9 Inter-TNUa Cable The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. 7.10 BITS Clock Cable The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion cables. 7.11 Y-Shaped Clock Cable The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz clock signals from the GCUa or GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa or SCUb board in the EPS. 7.12 Line Clock Signal Cable The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the GCUa board. 7.13 Straight-Through Cable The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/ OMUc/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the service subracks. 7.15 Alarm Box Signal Cable The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display. 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack. 7.17 GPS Signal Transmission Cable The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use. 7.18 OMU serial cable
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

The OMU serial cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal. 7.19 EMU RS485 Communication Cable The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and the EMU. 7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable The SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

7.1 Power Cables


The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables. The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distribution box at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internal power cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internal power cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.

Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box


Table 7-1 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the highpower power distribution box. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the internal power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the high-power power distribution box. Table 7-1 External power cables Name Color CrossSectional Area mm2 Externa l -48 V power cable Externa l RTN power cable Blue 25/35 Connector Type 1/ Installation Position 1 2-hole JG terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box 2-hole JG terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box Connector Type 2/ Installation Position 2 OT terminal/-48 V DC output port on the PDF OT terminal/-48 V DC output port on the PDF Quantity

Four per cabinet

Black

25/35

Four per cabinet

Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1) Name Color CrossSectional Area mm2 Internal -48 V DC power cable Blue 10 Connector Type 1/ Installation Position 1 OT terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box Connector Type 2/ Installation Position 2 OT terminal/-48 V DC output port on the subrack Quantity

Two per subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Name

Color

CrossSectional Area mm2

Connector Type 1/ Installation Position 1 OT terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box

Connector Type 2/ Installation Position 2 OT terminal/-48 V DC output port on the subrack

Quantity

Internal RTN power cable

Black

10

Two per subrack

Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2) Name Color CrossSectional Area mm2 Internal -48 V DC power cable Internal RTN power cable Blue 2 Connector Type 1/ Installation Position 1 OT terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box OT terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box Connector Type 2/ Installation Position 2 D-type connector/ Power input port on the independent fan subrack D-type connector/ Power input port on the independent fan subrack Quantity

Two per independent fan subrack

Black

Two per independent fan subrack

Figure 7-1 shows the external power cable. Figure 7-1 External power cable

(1) OT terminal

(2) 2-hole JG terminal

Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for subracks.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks

Figure 7-3 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack

Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution Box


Table 7-4 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box. Table 7-5 describes the internal power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box. Table 7-4 External power cables Name Color CrossSectional Area mm2 Externa l -48 V power cable Externa l RTN power cable Blue 25/35 Connector Type 1/ Installation Position 1 Cord end terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box Cord end terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box Connector Type 2/ Installation Position 2 OT terminal/-48 V DC output port on the PDF OT terminal/-48 V DC output port on the PDF Quantity

Four per cabinet

Black

25/35

Four per cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-5 Internal power cables Name Color CrossSectional Area mm2 Internal -48 V DC power cable Internal RTN power cable Blue 8 Connector Type 1/ Installation Position 1 Cord end terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box Cord end terminal/-48 V DC input port on the power distribution box Connector Type 2/ Installation Position 2 OT terminal/-48 V DC output port on the subrack Quantity

Two per subrack

Black

OT terminal/-48 V DC output port on the subrack

Two per subrack

The internal power cable and the external power cable have the same appearance when the BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box. Figure 7-4 shows the external/ internal power cable. Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable

X1: Cord end terminal

X2: OT terminal

7.2 PGND Cables


The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory. Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets are combined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacent cabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery. Table 7-6 describes the PGND cables.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-6 PGND cables Cable Name Color CrossSectional Area mm2 Connect or Type 1/ Installati on Position 1 OT terminal/ Groundin g bolt at the top rear of each cabinet OT terminal/ PGND busbar of each cabinet OT terminal/ PGND busbar of each cabinet OT terminal/ PGND busbar of each cabinet OT terminal/ Groundin g bolt on the base OT terminal/ PGND busbar of each cabinet Connector Type 2/ Installation Position 2 Quantity

External PGND cable

Green and yellow

25/35

OT terminal/ PGND output port on the PDF

One per cabinet

Intercabinet PGND cable

Green and yellow

OT terminal/ PGND busbar of each cabinet

Three between every two adjacent cabinets One per power distribution box

PGND cable for the power distributio n box

Green and yellow

OT terminal/Port for PGND cable on the power distribution box

PGND Green and cable for yellow the subrack

OT terminal/Port for the PGND cable on the subrack

Two per subrack

PGND cable for the cabinet door PGND cable for the independe nt fan subrack

Green and yellow

OT terminal/ Grounding bolt on the cabinet door OT terminal/ Grounding point of the independent fan subrack

Eight per cabinet

Green and yellow

One per independent fan subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables for the BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6 shows the other PGND cables. Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack

Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables

7.3 Optical Cable


The optical cable is used to connect the optical interface board to the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs, or to interconnect SCUa boards. It is optional in the BSC6900 and the number of optical cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

Classification of the Optical Cable


According to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can be classified into the following types: l l l LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
NOTE

l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the optical interface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on site requirements. l The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable. l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to the ODF or other NEs, or interconnects the optical interface boards. l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached with temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected to the RX port.

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Appearance
Table 7-7 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900. Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables Optical Cable Type LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/ multi-mode optical cable LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/ multi-mode optical cable LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/ multi-mode optical cable Appearance

Installation
The optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface board in the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PC connector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of the optical cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable

7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)


The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/ combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or split one input into two.

Function
The optical splitter/combiner splits or combines optical signals. Figure 7-8 shows the operating principle of an optical combiner. Figure 7-8 Operating principle of an optical combiner

Figure 7-9 shows the operating principle of an optical splitter. Figure 7-9 Operating principle of an optical splitter

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical splitter/combiner must be correctly connected. Otherwise, optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.

Appearance
Figure 7-10 shows the optical splitter/combiner. Figure 7-10 Optical splitter/combiner

Classification
The optical splitter/combiner can be classified into the following types according to the mode in which optical signals are transmitted: l l Single-mode optical splitter/combiner: The optical fiber of the single-mode optical splitter/ combinter is yellow. Multi-mode optical splitter/combiner: The optical fiber of the multi-mode optical splitter/ combiner is orange.

Application Scenario
When optical interface boards work in active/standby mode and optical transmission devices work in independent mode, optical splitters/combiners can be used to improve the redundancy performance of optical interface boards.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

CAUTION
Only the POUc board can be connected to an optical splitter/combiner. The optical splitter/combiner cannot be used to solve any of the following problems: l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. When the transmission on the TX optical fiber for the active optical port is interrupted, the BSC6900 reports a Multiplex Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm on the active and standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active and standby optical ports. l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. The transmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and the TX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a MS RDI alarm on the active and standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active and standby optical ports. l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. The transmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and the RX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm on the active and standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active and standby optical ports.

Installation
Figure 7-11 shows the installation positions of optical splitters/combiners. Figure 7-11 Installation positions of optical splitters/combiners

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk signals. The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

Appearance
Figure 7-12 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable. Figure 7-12 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector

(2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the cable)

(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connector to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin Assignment
The outer shield layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-8 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables Pin of DB44 Connec tor W1 Signal Micro Coaxia l Cable Identif ier 1 R1 Remarks Pin of DB44 Connec tor W2 Signal Micro Coaxia l Cable Identif ier 1 T1 Remarks

38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16

Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip

15 30

Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip

R2

14 29

T2

R3

13 28

T3

R4

12 27

T4

R5

11 26

T5

R6

10 25

T6

R7

9 24

T7

R8

8 7

T8

Table 7-9 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-8. Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable Signal Ring Tip Bearer shield layer of micro coaxial cables Core of micro coaxial cables

Installation
One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

Appearance
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links. Figure 7-13 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable. Figure 7-13 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector

(2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the cable) (5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements. Table 7-10 and Table 7-12 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/ standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4 X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 W3 Signal Micro Coaxial Cable Identifi er 1 Remark s X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor 15 30 2 R2 14 29 3 R3 13 28 4 R4 12 27 5 R5 11 26 6 R6 10 25 7 R7 9 24 8 R8 8 7 W4 Signal Micro Coaxial Cable Identifi er 1 Remark s

Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip

R1

Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip

T1

T2

T3

T4

T5

T6

T7

T8

NOTE

In Table 7-10, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal. Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.

Table 7-11 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-10. Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable Signal Ring Tip Bearer shield layer of coaxial cables Core of coaxial cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2 W2 Pin of X1 Connector 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Pin of X2 Connector 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Remarks PAIR W1 Pin of X1 Connector 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Pin of X2 Connector 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Remarks PAIR

NOTE

In Table 7-12, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shield layer of the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connected to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be connected to another NE directly. Figure 7-14 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-14 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables

7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-15 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable. Figure 7-15 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector

(2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the cable)

(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connector to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Pin Assignment
The outer shield layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-13 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable. Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable Pin of DB44 Connec tor W1 Signal 120Ohm Twisted Pair Cable Identifie r R1 Blue White R2 Orange White R3 Green White R4 Brown White R5 Grey White R6 Blue Red R7 Orange Red R8 Green Red Color Pin of DB44 Connec tor W2 Signal 120Ohm Twisted Pair Cable Identifie r T1 Blue White T2 Orange White T3 Green White T4 Brown White T5 Grey White T6 Blue Red T7 Orange Red T8 Green Red Color

38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16

Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+

15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7

Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+

Table 7-14 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-13.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable Signal Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/TTip/T+ Bearer One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1 signals The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1 signals One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/ T1 signals

Installation
One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/ PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/ T1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-16 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable. Figure 7-16 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector

(2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the cable) (5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements. Table 7-15 and Table 7-17 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/ standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable. Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4 X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 W3 Signal Twiste d Pair Cable Identifi er R1 Blue White R2 Orange White R3 Green White R4 Brown White R5 Grey White R6 Blue Red R7 Orange Red R8 Green Red Color X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 W4 Signal Twiste d Pair Cable Identifi er T1 Blue White T2 Orange White T3 Green White T4 Brown White T5 Grey White T6 Blue Red T7 Orange Red T8 Green Red Color

Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+

Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+

NOTE

In Table 7-15, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.

Table 7-16 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-15.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable Signal Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/TTip/T+ Bearer One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals to the BSC6900 The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals to the BSC6900 One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals from the BSC6900 The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals from the BSC6900

Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2 Twisted Pair Cable W2 Pin of X1 Connector 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Pin of X2 Connector 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Pin of X1 Connector 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Pin of X2 Connector 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Remarks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

7 Cables

In Table 7-17, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shield layer of the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable are connected to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable can also be connected to another NE directly. Figure 7-17 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables. Figure 7-17 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables

7.9 Inter-TNUa Cable


The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

Appearance
Figure 7-18 shows the inter-TNUa cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-18 Inter-TNUa cable

(1) DB14 (3) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the cable)

(2) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)

Installation
The two DB14 connectors at one end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active and standby TNUa boards in one subrack. The two DB14 connectors at the other end of the interTNUa cable are connected to the active and standby TNUa boards in another subrack. Figure 7-19 shows the installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-19 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables

7.10 BITS Clock Cable


The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion cables.

Appearance
Figure 7-20 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable. Figure 7-20 75-ohm coaxial clock cable

(1) SMB connector

(2) Label

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-21 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable. Figure 7-21 120-ohm clock conversion cable

(1) SMB connector

2Label

NOTE

The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector is used, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to the connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Installation
One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the GCUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source. Figure 7-22 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables. Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

7.11 Y-Shaped Clock Cable


The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz clock signals from the GCUa or GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa or SCUb board in the EPS.
NOTE

The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.

Appearance
Figure 7-23 shows the Y-shaped clock cable. Figure 7-23 Y-shaped clock cable

(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)

(2) RJ45 connector

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa or SCUb board in the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the active and standby GCUa or GCGa boards in the MPS. Figure 7-24 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables

7.12 Line Clock Signal Cable


The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the GCUa board.
NOTE

When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sent to the GCUa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is not required.

Appearance
Figure 7-25 shows the line clock signal cable. Figure 7-25 Line clock signal cable

(1) SMB connector

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Installation
One end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interface board. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the GCUa board.

7.13 Straight-Through Cable


The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/ OMUc/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

Appearance
Figure 7-26 shows the shielded straight-through cable. Figure 7-26 Shielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-27 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-27 Unshielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.

Pin Assignment
Table 7-18 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straightthrough cable and the unshielded straight-through cable. Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable X1 End X1-1 X1-2 X1-3 X1-4 X1-5 X1-6 X1-7 X1-8 Wire Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown X2 End X2-1 X2-2 X2-3 X2-4 X2-5 X2-6 X2-7 X2-8 Wire Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown

Installation
l When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boards that are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-28.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-28 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the SCUa boards in different subracks

When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa/OMUc board to other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1 on the OMUa/OMUc board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the Ethernet port on the other devices. When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d board to other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the Ethernet port on the other devices. When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the XPUa/XPUb board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the CBC.

7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack


The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the service subracks.

Appearance
Figure 7-29 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-29 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one end and a DB15 connector at the other end. Table 7-19 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack. Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack Start X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.SHELL End X2.7 X2.6 X2.3 X2.2 X2.5 X2.SHELL Description Tx+ TxRx+ RxGND X1.SHELL is connected to X2.SHELL through the shield layer. Twisted pair Remarks Twisted pair

Table 7-20 describes the signals listed in Table 7-19. Table 7-20 Signals Signal Tx+ TxRx+ RxSignal Description Positive phase signal transmitted Negative phase signal transmitted Positive phase signal received Negative phase signal received

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.
NOTE

When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to top. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to the bottom subrack in the cabinet.

7.15 Alarm Box Signal Cable


The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

Appearance
The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual type must be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signal cable with the DB9 connector as an example. Figure 7-30 shows an alarm box signal cable. Figure 7-30 Alarm box signal cable

Pin Assignment
Table 7-21 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable. Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable RJ45 3 5 6 DB9 5 2 3

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial port on the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the serial port on the LMT. Figure 7-31 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable. Figure 7-31 Connection of the alarm box signal cable

7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box


The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

Appearance
Figure 7-32 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box. Figure 7-32 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end and a DB15 connector at the other end. Table 7-22 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box Start X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.SHELL End X2.3 X2.2 X2.7 X2.6 X2.5 X2.SHELL Description Tx+ TxRx+ RxRTN X1.SHELL is connected to X2.SHELL through the shield layer. Twisted pair Remarks Twisted pair

Table 7-23 describes the signals listed in Table 7-22. Table 7-23 Signals Signal Tx+ TxRx+ RxSignal Description Positive phase signal transmitted Negative phase signal transmitted Positive phase signal received Negative phase signal received

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box is connected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-33 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-33 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

7.17 GPS Signal Transmission Cable


The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.

Appearance
Figure 7-34 shows the GPS signal transmission cable. Figure 7-34 GPS signal transmission cable

X1: SMA male connector

X2: N-type female connector

X3: N-type male connector

Installation
Connect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector of a 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmission cable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connected
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

to port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end of the cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.

7.18 OMU serial cable


The OMU serial cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.

Appearance
Figure 7-35 shows the OMU serial cable. Figure 7-35 OMU serial cable

Pin Assignment
Both ends of the OMU serial cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-24 lists the pins of the OMU serial cable. Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial cable DB9 2 3 5 DB9 3 2 5

Installation Position
One end of the OMU serial cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. The other end of the OMU serial cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance terminal.
NOTE

The OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.

7.19 EMU RS485 Communication Cable


The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and the EMU.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Appearance
Figure 7-36 shows the RS485 communication cable. Figure 7-36 RS485 communication cable

Pin Assignment
Table 7-25 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable. Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable RJ45 4 1 5 2 DB9 2 3 6 7

Installation
The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9 female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the J2 port on a high-capacity power distribution box or the COM1 port on a common power distribution box.
NOTE

One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal cable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable is recommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is not sufficient.

7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable


The SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.

Appearance
Figure 7-37 shows the SFP+ high-speed cable.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-37 SFP+ high-speed cable

Installation
Both ends of the SFP+ high-speed cable are connected to the 10G Ethernet ports on the SCUb boards in different subracks.

Length of the SFP+ High-Speed Cable


The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8
About This Chapter

LEDs on the Boards

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards. 8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. 8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. 8.9 LEDs on the FG2d Board Among all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2d board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. 8.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.11 LEDs on the GOUa Board There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.12 LEDs on the GOUc Board There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED), and ACT (optical port LED). 8.13 LEDs on the GOUd Board There are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED), and ACT (optical port LED). 8.14 LEDs on the MDMC Board There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM. 8.15 LEDs on the OIUa Board There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. 8.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD. 8.17 LEDs on the OMUc Board There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD. 8.18 LEDs on the PAMU Board There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM. 8.19 LEDs on the PEUa Board There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.20 LEDs on the POUc Board There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. 8.21 LEDs on the SCUa Board Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. 8.22 LEDs on the SCUb Board Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port. 8.23 LEDs on the TNUa Board There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 8.24 LEDs on the XPUa Board Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. 8.25 LEDs on the XPUb Board Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board. Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board. Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUc board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
238

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED ALM

Color Red

Status OFF ON or blinking

Description There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

ACT

Green

ON OFF

8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board. Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUg board. Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUg board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is functional. The board is loading software or it is abnormal.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board


There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board. Table 8-6 LEDs on the EIUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board. Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2a board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
241

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED ALM

Color Red

Status OFF ON or blinking

Description There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Green

ON OFF

Green

OFF

Blinking

8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board. Table 8-8 LEDs on the FG2c board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.
242

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Color Green

Status ON OFF

Description The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Orange

OFF

Blinking

8.9 LEDs on the FG2d Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2d board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the FG2d board. Table 8-9 LEDs on the FG2d board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port) Green ON OFF Orange OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status Blinking

Description There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

8.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board. Table 8-10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

8.11 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board. Table 8-11 LEDs on the GOUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status ON OFF

Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

8.12 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED), and ACT (optical port LED). Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board. Table 8-12 LEDs on the GOUc board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (optical port LED) Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED ACT (optical port LED)

Color Green

Status OFF

Description There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Blinking

8.13 LEDs on the GOUd Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED), and ACT (optical port LED). Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the GOUd board. Table 8-13 LEDs on the GOUd board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (optical port LED) ACT (optical port LED) Green ON OFF Green OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Blinking

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.14 LEDs on the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM. Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board. Table 8-14 LEDs on the MDMC board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s OFF Description The MDMC board is functional and communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board properly. The MDMC board is not working or it does not communicate with the SCUa/ SCUb board properly. The power supply to the MDMC board is abnormal or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm. The power distribution box is faulty. During the self-check of the MDMC board, however, the ALM LED is also ON. This indicates that the ALM LED is functional.

ALM

Red

OFF ON

8.15 LEDs on the OIUa Board


There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board. Table 8-15 LEDs on the OIUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM
Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm.
247

Red

OFF

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status ON or blinking

Description There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The STM-1 port does not receive signals properly. The STM-1 port receives signals properly.

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LOS

Green

ON OFF

8.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD. Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board. Table 8-16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF OFFLINE Blue ON OFF ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s HD Green OFF Description The board is functional. The board is being started. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode, or the board is disconnected. The board can be removed. The board cannot be removed. The board is being switched over to the other working mode. There is no read or write operation on the hard disk.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status Blinking

Description The hard disk is being read or written to.

8.17 LEDs on the OMUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD. Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board. Table 8-17 LEDs on the OMUc board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF OFL Blue ON OFF ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s HDD Green OFF Blinking Description The board is functional. The board is being started. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode, or the board is disconnected. The board can be removed. The board cannot be removed. The board is being switched over to the other working mode. There is no read or write operation on the hard disk. The hard disk is being read or written to.

8.18 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM. Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-18 LEDs on the PAMU board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s OFF Description The PAMU board is functional and communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board properly. The PAMU board is faulty or it does not communicate with the SCUa/SCUb board properly. The power supply to the PAMU board is abnormal or the power distribution box does not work properly. There is no alarm. The power distribution box is faulty. During the self-check of the PAMU board, however, the ALM LED is also ON. This indicates that the ALM LED is functional.

ALM

Red

OFF ON

8.19 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-19 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board. Table 8-19 LEDs on the PEUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.20 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. Table 8-20 describes the LEDs on the POUc board. Table 8-20 LEDs on the POUc board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LOS Green ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The STM-1 port does not receive signals properly. The STM-1 port receives signals properly.

8.21 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 8-21 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board. Table 8-21 LEDs on the SCUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status ON OFF

Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Green

ON OFF

Green

OFF

Blinking

8.22 LEDs on the SCUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port. Table 8-22 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board. Table 8-22 LEDs on the SCUb board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm.
252

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED ACT

Color Green

Status ON OFF

Description The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected.

LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port)

Green

ON OFF

Green

OFF

Blinking 10G LINK Green ON OFF

8.23 LEDs on the TNUa Board


There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 8-23 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board. Table 8-23 LEDs on the TNUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

ALM

Red

OFF ON or blinking

ACT

Green

ON OFF

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.24 LEDs on the XPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 8-24 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board. Table 8-24 LEDs on the XPUa board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port) Green ON OFF Green OFF Blinking Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

8.25 LEDs on the XPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet port: LINK and ACT. Table 8-25 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-25 LEDs on the XPUb board LED RUN Color Green Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON or blinking ACT Green ON OFF LINK (at the Ethernet port) ACT (at the Ethernet port) Green ON OFF Orange OFF Blinking Description The board is functional. The board is in loading state. There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode. The link is well connected. The link is disconnected. There is no data transmission over the Ethernet port. There is data transmission over the Ethernet port.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

9
About This Chapter

DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900. 9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack. 9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6. 9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch. 9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch. 9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. 9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack. Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-1 Description about the bits Bit 1-5 Description Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit is set to OFF, it indicates 1. Odd parity check bit Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON Startup type of the subrack, the default value is OFF.
NOTE l For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6000 to BSC6900, keep the former settings. l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed to OFF.

6 7 8 (the most significant bit)

CAUTION
l You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the poweron is invalid.

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd number. The method for setting the bits is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required. Set bit 7 to ON. Set bit 8 to OFF. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF. l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON. Table 9-2 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case. Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch Subr ack No. 0 Bit 1 0 ON 2 0 ON 3 0 ON 4 0 ON 5 0 ON 6 0 ON 7 0 ON 8 1 OFF Setting of the DIP Switch

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Subr ack No. 1

Bit 1 1 OFF 2 0 ON 1 OFF 1 OFF 0 ON 0 ON 3 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 1 OF F 1 OF F 4 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 5 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 6 1 OFF 1 OFF 0 ON 1 OFF 0 ON 7 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 8 1 OFF 1 OFF 1 OFF 1 OFF 1 OFF

Setting of the DIP Switch

0 ON

1 OFF

0 ON

1 OFF

9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6. Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board

(2) Bottom plate

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON. l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode. In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF. l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board. Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75ohm Coaxial Cable ON Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF

S1

Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 0-7

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switch

Bit

Description

Setting for 75ohm Coaxial Cable ON

Setting for 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable OFF

Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 8-15 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 16-23 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 24-31 Reserved TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 0-7 TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 8-15 TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 16-23 TX ground switch of E1s/ T1s 24-31

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

1-4 S3 1-8

ON

OFF

S4

1-8

ON

OFF

S5

1-8

ON

OFF

S6

1-8

ON

OFF

Table 9-4 describes the different DIP switches. Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches DIP Switch E1/T1 impedance selection switch Description Used to select the logical transmission mode of the board and to notify the software of the current transmission mode Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end of the E1/T1 signals

E1/T1 TX ground switch

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

9 DIP Switches on Components

l l l

The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default. The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches on the standby board. The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board


The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch. Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board. Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board. To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 9-5. Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board Address 0 Bit 1 (the most significant bit) 2 3 4 (the least significant bit) Setting of DIP Bit ON ON ON ON Description 0 0 0 0

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 9-5.

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch. Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board. To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table 9-6. Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board Address 0 Bit 1 (the most significant bit) 2 3 4 (the least significant bit) Setting of DIP Bit ON ON ON ON Description 0 0 0 0

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-6.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board

(2) Bottom plate

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description


NOTE

9 DIP Switches on Components

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed. l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are two square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the subboard, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to OFF, turn them inwards. l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced mode. l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-7 describes the DIP switches on the PEUa board. Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board DIP Switc h S2 Bit Description Setting of DIP Switch ON Meaning

1-8

TX ground switch of E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode Setting the working mode to other modes Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode Setting the working mode to other modes Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode
265

OFF

S4

1-8

TX ground switch of E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

ON

OFF

S6

1-8

TX ground switch of E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switc h

Bit

Description

Setting of DIP Switch OFF

Meaning

Setting the working mode to other modes Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode Setting the working mode to other modes Setting the working mode to E1 unbalanced mode Setting the working mode to E1 balanced mode Setting the working mode to T1 mode Setting the working mode to J1 mode

S8

1-8

TX ground switch of E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

ON

OFF

S10

1-2

DIP switch for setting the working mode, consisting of two bits

(ON, ON)

(OFF, ON)

(ON, OFF)

(OFF, OFF)

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in Table 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1. Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack) DIP Switch SW1 Bit 1 (the least significant bit) 2 3 4 (the most significant bit) Setting of DIP Switch OFF ON ON ON Description 1 0 0 0

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board. Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in Table 9-9. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the address of the PFCU board is 4.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack) DIP Switch SW1 Bit 1 (the least significant bit) 2 3 4 (the most significant bit) Setting of DIP Switch ON ON OFF ON Description 0 0 1 0

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268